doctor of philosophy harris (coach) and olav solgaard for reading this dissertation, especially in...
TRANSCRIPT
AN OPTICALLY CONTROLLED OPTOELECTRONIC SWITCH:
FROM THEORY
TO
50 GIGAHERTZ BURST-LOGIC DEMONSTRATION
A DISSERTATION
SUBMITTED TO THE DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED PHYSICS
AND THE COMMITTEE ON GRADUATE STUDIES
OF STANFORD UNIVERSITY
IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS
FOR THE DEGREE OF
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Micah B. Yairi
November 2001
ii
© Copyright by Micah Yairi 2002
All Rights Reserved
iv
AbstractFor high-speed communication, it is essential to multiplex, demultiplex, and
switch individual data bits at very rapid rates. Similarly, in wavelength division
multiplexed (WDM) systems the ability to change wavelengths dramatically increases the
potential connectivity of such transmission systems. This dissertation presents work on a
unique optically controlled optical gate that is capable of both high speed optical gating
and wavelength conversion.
The optically controlled optical gates (OCOG) described herein alter the
reflection of a surface-normal pulse of light in response to the presence or absence of a
control light pulse. Low required switching energy is possible for two reasons: (1)
separation of photogenerated electrons and holes creates large changes in the electric
field and (2) the absorption of the multiple quantum wells in a p-i-n diode is strongly
field-dependent due to the quantum confined Stark effect. The recovery mechanism used
in these devices is based on diffusive conduction, a novel optoelectronic behavior that
enables fast gating. In essence, the localized voltage change that builds up in the vicinity
of the incident light pulse relaxes in an analogous manner to a voltage pulse in a two-
dimensional dissipative transmission line. This recovery is a local effect and can,
therefore, be made fast -- on the order of picoseconds; it is not constrained by the overall
RC time constant of the device. With proper design, multiple insulating and conducting
layers within a device may be used to modify the voltage relaxation process, further
enhancing OCOG switching speed.
Three generations of optically controlled quantum well optical gates were
investigated. For each generation, both the theory of operation and experimental results
are presented. Our multi-layered dual-diode device exhibits a 7 ps FWHM switching
time that requires a switching energy of only 40 fJ/�m2. This device has also
demonstrated burst-logic operation at 50 GHz. These optically controlled optical gates
are not only low power, but they are scalable in 2D arrays and integrable with silicon
circuitry, offering intriguing possibilities for applications.
v
Acknowledgements
There are many colleagues whose assistance and support made this work possible.
Ellen Judd, Chris Coldren, Petar Atanackovic, Pauline Prather, and Tom Carver helped
from growing the wafers to simulating quantum well absorption spectra. Most important,
however, has been Volkan Demir whose hard work, unending energy, enthusiasm, and
optimism has helped sustain my research effort. Working alongside him day in and day
out into the wee hours of the night has been a true pleasure. I am indebted to him.
I would also like to take this opportunity to express my deep appreciation to all
the faculty members at Stanford University who have so graciously shared their
knowledge and wisdom with me during my graduate studies at this wonderful institute of
higher education. In regard to the work reported herein, special thanks go to Professors
Jim Harris (Coach) and Olav Solgaard for reading this dissertation, especially in such a
timely fashion and for their thoughtful comments and suggestions.
A very special place in my thanks is reserved for Professor David Miller, my
advisor and mentor. I count it a small miracle that I was able to join the Miller group and
work so closely with him. It has been an incredible experience, being the first student
actually in the group, seeing it grow and flourish from just his office and a couple of
rooms full of discarded equipment into a dynamic world-class laboratory with nearly
twenty students. His light-handed approach has allowed me the freedom to commit a few
mistakes and helped me learn how to conduct careful and useful experiments. His
advice, particularly that there IS a logical reason for whatever might be occurring in the
laboratory, and that it CAN be understood, has helped me become a better physicist.
And, of equal or greater worth, Professor Miller provided the necessary support and
encouragement; he always did right by me. I cannot thank him enough.
I have had a truly wonderful time at Stanford. And this is largely due to all my
friends – The Miller Group – with whom I’ve been able to work every day!: Helen,
Volkan, Vijit, Gordon, Bianca, Diwakar, Ryohei, Henry, Sameer, Noah, Aparna, Martina,
vi
Christof, Petar, and Hatije, Ray, and Yang. Sometimes it was so much fun I didn’t get
any work done all day long. It has been great to wake up in the morning and know you
get to spend the whole day working with friends; I can’t imagine life here without you
guys!
I would also like to thank my long-time friends and roomates: Gaeron McClure,
John Hauser, Chris Nicholas, Ken Brownfield, Gil Winograd, Jitendra Mohan, Joost
Bakker, Mitchell Golner, John Fay, and Diwakar Agarwal. They have stood by me
through thick and thin for all the sorrows and joys I have faced, managing to tolerate my
faults, and helped me to reach this point.
Finally, there is my family. Mom, Father, Dani, and Keren. Words can never
express my love.
vii
Table of Contents Page #
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
1.1 Establishing General Switching Principles 2
1.1.1 What aspects of an optical signal can be switched? 2
1.1.2 What methods are available to enable optical switching? 2
1.1.3 What properties are desired in an optical switch? 3
1.2 Comparing Optical Switches 5
1.2.1 Comparisons based on nonlinearity 5
1.2.2 Switching speed and switching energy comparisons 7
1.3 Summary 9
References 11
Chapter 2: Methods of Optical Switching 14
2.1 Optical-Electrical-Optical Devices (OEOs) 15
2.2 Electronically-Controlled Optical Switches 16
2.2.1 Electrooptic Modulators 17
2.2.2 Electro-absorption modulators 20
2.2.3 Other voltage-controlled devices 21
2.3 Optically-controlled Switches 22
2.3.1 Coherent switches 23
2.3.2 Incoherent switches 30
2.4 Self-electrooptic-effect devices (SEEDS) 37
References 42
Chapter 3: OCOG Device Concept 51
3.1 First generation OCOG-1 51
3.1.1 Principles of OCOG-1 operation 51
3.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of OCOG-1 57
3.1.3 Uses of OCOG-1 59
viii
3.2 Second generation OCOG-2 60
3.2.1 Principles of OCOG-2 operation 60
3.2.2 OCOG-2 Advantage and Disadvantages 63
3.3 Third generation OCOG-3 63
References 65
Chapter 4: Theory of Optically Controlled Optical Gates 66
4.1 Theory of Diffusive Conduction 66
4.1.1 Qualitative Descriptions of Enhanced Diffusion 66
4.1.2 General Modeling Approaches 71
4.1.3 Giant Ambipolar Diffusion 74
4.1.4 Diffusive Conduction 78
4.1.5 Comparison Between Approaches 81
4.1.6 Uses, Limits, and Limitations of Enhanced Diffusion 83
4.2 Theory of Multilayer Diffusive Conduction 85
4.2.1 2-layer case 85
4.2.2 N-layer case 89
4.2.3 Discussion 90
References 95
Chapter 5: Experimental Methodology 98
5.1 Device Growth 98
5.2 Device Processing 98
5.3 Device Characterization 100
5.3.1 Electrical characterization 100
5.3.2 Optical characterization 101
5.4 Pump-probe Set-up 103
5.4.1 General description 103
5.4.2 Second-harmonic generation 106
5.4.3 Creation of 4-pulse burst data stream 107
References 108
ix
Chapter 6: Results and Analysis 109
6.1 First Generation OCOG-1 109
6.1.1 Small signal experimental results and simulation 111
6.1.2 Large signal experimental results and simulation 112
6.1.3 Signal gain (large signal) experimental results and simulation 114
6.2 Second Generation OCOG-2 115
6.2.1 Small signal experimental results and simulation 115
6.2.2 Further test of Diffusive Conduction 117
6.2.3 Large signal experimental results and simulation 123
6.3 Third Generation OCOG-3 126
6.3.1 Small signal experimental results and simulation 127
6.3.2 Large signal experimental results and simulation 128
6.3.3 Multiple pulse (small signal) experimental results and simulation 132
References 133
Chapter 7: Simulation Methods 134
7.1 Introduction 134
7.2 OCOG-1: Charge transport modeling in p-i(MQW)-n Devices 135
7.2.1 Governing equations 135
7.2.2 Simulation implementation 140
7.3 Large-Signal model: OCOG-2 146
7.4 Small signal FFT Models: OCOG-3 152
References 158
Chapter 8: Discussion and Future Directions 161
8.1 Ultimate Limits of OCOG devices 161
8.2 How do OCOGs compare to other optical switches? 166
8.3 Future research directions 161
8.4 Conclusions (Summary) 173
References 174
x
Appendix A: Examples of Multilayer Diffusive Conduction Calculation 176
Appendix B: Analysis of Photocurrent Spectra 180
Appendix C: Optically-Controlled Optical Gate Device Designs 194
xi
List of Tables
Page #Chapter 1
Table 1.1 Comparison of Optical Switch Energies and Repetition Rates 8
Chapter 7
Table 7.1 OCOG-1 Key Simulation Parameters 143
Chapter 8
Table 8.1 Comparison Between Selected All-Optical Switches 170
Appendix A
Table A.1 Multiple-Layer Variables 176
Appendix B
Table B.1 Legend Notation 185
Table B.2 Comparison Between Simulated and Graphically-Determined
Exciton Resonances 190
Appendix C
Table C.1 OCOG-1 Structure Design 192
Table C.2 OCOG-2 Structure Design 193
Table C.3 OCOG-3 Structure Design 194
xii
List of Illustrations Page #
Chapter 1
Figure 1.1 The nonlinear coefficient of the refractive index, n2, (top) and afigure-of-merit for switching (bottom) as a function ofrelaxation time for a variety of materials. 6
Chapter 2
Figure 2.1 Schematic diagram of an OEO switch 15
Figure 2.2 Schematic diagram of an electrically-controlled waveguideinterferometric switch 18
Figure 2.3 Schematic illustration of optical parametric generation 24
Figure 2.4 Illustration of switching behavior of a soliton dragging gate 27
Figure 2.5 Schematic diagram of a terahertz optical asymmetricdemultiplexer 31
Figure 2.6 A schematic illustration of cross-grain modulation in asemiconductor optical amplifier 33
Figure 2.7 Hypothetical response of a bistable device 36
Figure 2.8 Schematic illustration of an R-SEED 38
Chapter 3
Figure 3.1 Schematic diagram of OCOG-1 52
Figure 3.2 Schematic illustrations of OCOG-1 device dynamics 52
Figure 3.3 Description of the Quantum Confined Stark Effect (QCSE) 53
Figure 3.4 Illustration of a mesh of resistors and capacitors 54
Figure 3.5 Conceptual illustrations of the resistance per square andcapacitance per unit area of a p-i-n diode with an incidentcontrol pulse with a relative small spot size and the resultingvoltage due to the separation of the photogenerated carriers 55
Figure 3.6 Illustration of relaxation of the initial Gaussian voltagedistribution due to diffusive electrical conduction 56
xiii
Figure 3.7 Illustration of the different electric field magnitudes due tocarrier separation depending on whether of not carriers are ableto escape from quantum wells in the intrinsic region 58
Figure 3.8 Device schematic of OCOG-2 61
Figure 3.9 Schematic illustrations of OCOG-2 device dynamics 62
Figure 3.10 Illustration of induced voltage in a dual-layer OCOG device 63
Figure 3.11 Schematic of the p-i-n-p-i(MQW)-n structure of OCOG-3 64
Chapter 4
Figure 4.1 Schematic diagrams showing how an incident light pulse maycreate effective lateral electric fields in a p-i-n structure 68
Figure 4.2 Schematic p-i-n structure showing distributed resistance andcapacitance 70
Figure 4.3 Schematic of 1D RC transmission line with a single or withtwo resistive planes 80
Figure 4.4 Schematic of two-layer 1D RC structure 85
Figure 4.5 Bottom diode voltage behavior (-VCB) at pulse center (r=0) 89
Figure 4.6 Changes in the voltage relaxation of the bottom most layer in amulti-layered OCOG devices as the number of layers increases 92
Figure 4.7 Small signal response of OCOG-3 compared to simulations ofboth 3 and 2-layer structures. 93
Chapter 5
Figure 5.1 Image of a wire-bonded OCOG-2 device 100
Figure 5.2 Contour graph of photocurrent spectra of OCOG-1 102
Figure 5.3 OCOG-1 reflectivity as a function of reverse bias for variouswavelengths of picosecond pulses 102
Figure 5.4 Schematic of optical pump-probe set-up 104
Figure 5.5 Photographs of pump-probe set-up 105
Figure 5.6 Optical sub-system for generating a 4-pulse bit stream 106
xiv
Chapter 6
Figure 6.1 Schematic diagram of OCOG-1 109
Figure 6.2 Small signal response of OCOG-1 111
Figure 6.3 OCOG-1 Reflectivity modulation of probe (signal) pulse as afunction of time across at various pump (control) pulse powers 113
Figure 6.4 Change in reflected probe (signal) power normalized againstpump (control) pulse power – equivalent to signal gain forOCOG-1 114
Figure 6.5 Schematic diagram of OCOG-2 116
Figure 6.6 Small-signal response of OCOG-2 117
Figure 6.7 Comparison between data and simulation of OCOG-2dynamics for a different values of the radius of the incidentlight pulse 118
Figure 6.8 Figure 6.8: Illustration of on-center and off-center behavior inan OCOG-2 device at four instances in time 120
Figure 6.9 The measured and simulated device response for variousseparation distances between the probe and control pulses 121
Figure 6.10 Figure 6.10: Simulation of the spatial and temporal responseof the bottom layer in an OCOG-2 device 122
Figure 6.11 OCOG-2 response to large signal control inputs 123
Figure 6.12 Normalized change in OCOG-2 reflectivity as a function oftime for various control pulse powers 124
Figure 6.13 Schematic of OCOG-3 127
Figure 6.14 Small signal response of OCOG-3 128
Figure 6.15 Large signal response of OCOG-3 129
Figure 6.16 Overall and initial OCOG-3 device response at a various inputpowers 130
Figure 6.17 “Turn-on” of OCOG-2 device response for various inputpowers 131
Figure 6.18 Multiple-pulse, small-signal response of OCOG-3 with 20 pspulse separation 132
xv
Chapter 7
Figure 7.1 Schematic flow-chart of time-iterative large-signal computersimulation 141
Figure 7.2: Conceptual illustration of the behavior of a p-i-n device at aparticular lateral (x,y) point in which voltage diffusion occursresults in the overall voltage between the doped layersrecovering from the change in voltage due to the separation ofphotogenerated carriers before those carriers have been sweptout of the intrinsic region 149
Figure 7.3: G(t), the normalized incident light pulse that createsphotogenerated carriers 153
Figure 7.4 R(t), the change in voltage shielding across the top intrinsiclayer due to the absorption of a instantaneous light pulse 154
Figure 7.5 D(t), the voltage decay in the bottom layer of a two-layerdevice due to diffusive conduction of a “time slice” of voltageshielding 155
Figure 7.6 Convolution of G(t), R(t), D(t), and S(t) from Figs. 7.3, 7.4, and7.5 above, providing the small-signal voltage response of thebottom layer of a two-layer device 156
Figure 7.7 Small signal simulation of multiple pulses with variousrepetition periods 157
Chapter 8
Figure 8.1 Small-signal simulation of next-generation OCOG device,OCOG-4 164
Figure 8.2 Reported demonstrations of high bit rate data transmission in afiber optic cable 167
Figure 8.3 Schematic illustration of a dual-diode optically controlledwaveguide switch (OCWS) 171
Figure 8.4 Conceptual view of a reconfigurable NxN wavelengthconverter based on OCWS devices 172
Appendix A
Figure A.1 Illustration depicting Ii and Ji 176
xvi
Appendix B
Figure B.1 OCOG-1 photocurrent. 181
Figure B.1.b OCOG-1 photocurrent, expanded view 182
Figure B.2 Differential photocurrent (second derivative) of OCOG-1 183
Figure B.3 Simulation of heavy hole exciton and 1st excited electron-stateexciton resonance splitting 185
Figure B.4 Simulation of Stark ladders for adjacent wells, ground stateelectron and hole and 1st excited state electron and hole 186
Figure B.5 Simulation of next-to-adjacent well Stark ladder splittings withheavy hole exciton resonance 187
Figure B.6 Simulation of various Stark ladders and the heavy hole excitonresonances 187
Figure B.7 OCOG-1 photocurrent data and simulation 188
Figure B.8 Theoretical Stark ladders overlapped against photocurrentspectra 189
1
Chapter I: Introduction
A new world that fundamentally changes the way people communicate, learn, and
process information is emerging. Advances such as virtual multiuser white and
video/computer phones that can connect hundreds of millions of people together across
the planet are not in the distant future but merely a few years away. The current
backbone of the telecommunications network has evolved to the point where most data is
sent optically through fiber optic cables. Realizing this future vision, however, requires
an optical communications network able to route orders of magnitude more information
than it can today, transporting data over long distances at fast bit rates between large
numbers of people. Optical switches are crucial for such data manipulation. Current
optical switches, however, are insufficient for this task; they are too slow, expensive, and
do not scale well with either the rapidly increasing number of users or bitstream data
rates. The focus of this dissertation is a new type of optical switch -- an optically
controlled optical gate (OCOG) -- that has demonstrated its potential to help overcome
these hurdles. An OCOG changes the reflectivity or transmission of an optical signal
beam by virtue of a separate optical control pulse at speeds approaching a hundred
gigabits per seconds (Gbps). It provides switching capability that is low powered, fast,
and scalable while maintaining integrability with electronics and flexibility of use.
This introduction places OCOGs in the context of other optical switches. This is
done by first establishing general optical switching principles through answering the
following questions:
∙ What aspects of an optical bitstream can be switched?
∙ What methods are available to enable optical switching?
∙ What properties are desired in an optical switch?
∙ What constraints are placed on optical switches from other components of a
communication network?
Next, the optical switches are evaluated by comparing data on switching energy and
switching time. The more common assessment method, that of comparing the
magnitudes of the nonlinear coefficients of switches, is deemed to be of limited viability.
2
1.1 ESTABLISHING GENERAL SWITCHING PRINCIPLES
1.1.1 What aspects of an optical signal can be switched?The essence of a communication switch is the ability to change the channel along
which data flows. These channels are the switch’s degrees of freedom. For optical data
switches these degrees of freedom include intensity, spatial location, frequency, phase,
polarization, pulse time location, and spatial mode. Optical data are usually encoded by
intensity modulation.i It is also possible to encode data (e.g., soliton pulses) in such a
way that the temporal location of an optical pulse within a given time window of a bit
determines whether the pulse represents a 1 or a 0. Data channels themselves are
differentiated by the remaining degrees or freedom of optical signals, i.e., spatial location
(which fiber optic cable it is in) or wavelength. In some situations these channels are
capable of propagating simultaneously along a single fiber without interfering with each
other. For example, using wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) allows several
optical data streams, channels, to propagate independently along a fiber, each at a
different wavelength. Alternatively, in time division multiplexing (TDM), different
channels use the same wavelength but are differentiated by their time slots within the data
stream. Unless a special, more expensive, fiber is used, the polarization of a beam of
light is quickly randomized as it propagates, severely hindering the use of polarization as
a means for differentiating channels. The focus in this discussion will be primarily on
optical switches that change the wavelength or redirect an input optical stream or
multiplex/demultiplex a TDM bitstream.
1.1.2 What methods are available to enable optical switching?
Three general methods are used to control switching. One, the optical signal may
be detected, converted into an electrical signal and processed, and subsequently
re-emitted as a new optical signal. This is referred to as OEO. Two, the optical signal
maintains its optical form, but its channel may be controlled and redirected using an
3
electrical signal. Three, the optical signal maintains its optical form, but its channel may
be controlled and redirected using an optical signal.
1.1.3 What properties are desired in an optical switch?The primary function of switches in a communications network is to either
redirect or multiplex/demultiplex input bitstreams into the proper output channels.
Without these essential features, a network will not function. Providing this functionality
requires or is improved by:
∙ high speed, both for switching speed and switch repetition rate∙ large magnitude signal change, both in signal energy and in relative change (contrast ratio, CR)∙ low latency (delay)∙ low energy consumption and energy dissipation∙ scalability (expandable in 1-D or 2-D arrays)∙ small physical size∙ cascadablity (provide logic level restoration)∙ history independence∙ low cost∙ non-critical, non-sensitive set-up and operation∙ integrability with signal input, output, and control∙ good input/output isolation
Switches must not only incorporate many of the above attributes, but they are also
constrained by other components of the network, including the transmitters, receivers,
types of data, the medium through which the data travel between transmitters and
receivers, and the physical elements of network control. It is assumed here that the data
are binary bitstreams and that the medium for data transmission is fiberoptic cable as
opposed to electrical cable. (As discussed in Appendix A, fiberoptic cable provides
many advantages compared to electrical cable for high bit rate, long-distance
communication). Because the data travels in an optical form, optical switches are
required.
Transmitters are capable of providing 1-10 GHz data using active components,
such as edge-emitting lasers (e.g., distributed feedback lasers, DFBs) or vertical cavity
surface emitting lasers (VCSELs),[1-4] and up to 40 GHz data using modulators.[5-8]
i Frequency and phase modulation are also possible, though uncommon. These are referred to asfrequency- and phase-shift keying, FSK and PSK.
4
Depending on the application, switches must be able to handle such bit rates, or even
faster rates if the data is to be muliplexed in time.
System-level operation and control of the network also exert a strong influence on
what is required of switches. At present, most intelligence or logic capability is handled
by electronic circuitry. Optical logic is not currently competitive and will not be
competitive for the foreseeable future, at least for logically complex operations.
Therefore, any complex intelligence aimed at controlling switches, such as routing and
higher-level operations, will reach the switches only as electrical signals. This suggests
that electrically-controlled optical switches will be needed. On the other hand,
optically-controlled optical switches in some situations can be more efficient and
significantly faster than their electrically-controlled counterparts. When little intelligence
is required, they can provide functionality that is difficult to do electronically, such as
high speed multiplexing or demultiplexing of bitstreams. Similarly, wavelength
conversion is particularly efficient using optically controlled devices. Hybrid
architectures may be imagined which combine the best of both types of control signals.
For example, it is possible to design a routing system that switches large blocks of data
electronically but requires high speed bit-level switching – such as wavelength
conversion – that may be done much more efficiently with optically controlled devices.
Consequently, optically-controlled optical switches may be needed in future
communication networks.
Another system-level constraint on switches comes from the nature of the data to
be routed. The length of data packets and individual bit duration may strongly impact the
required speed of the switch as suggested in the previous paragraph. Meeting the
potential requirement of very short bit duration in future TDM bitstreams may be
possible only by using optically controlled switches. The higher level structure of future
data networks is an active area of research, and no definite conclusions may be drawn
about the required switching speeds at this time.
5
1.2 COMPARING OPTICAL SWITCHES
1.2.1 Comparisons based on nonlinearityIs there a metric, such as a particular physical attribute, that measures how well a
switch functions compared to others? All switches are inherently nonlinear devices and,
therefore, the nonlinearity of a switch is one measure that may provide a good
figure-of-merit. A linear device treats signal and control inputs independently; no effect
on the signal input is possible due to the presence or absence of a control input.
Consequently there is no switching. A nonlinear interaction, however, does not treat the
inputs independently, hence one input effects the other. In an optical switch, nonlinearity
is generally due to coupling between the propagating electric field of light and the
charged particles, principally electrons, of the particular material of the switch itself.
Many switches have a well-defined, measurable material nonlinearity. For
example, optical parametric switches are rigorously described by a power series-based
nonlinearity in terms of nonlinear susceptibilities (i.e. �(2), �(3), etc.) In semiconductors,
changes in absorption and the index of refraction due to band-gap filling and related
effects, are similarly well-described by a nonlinear complex dielectric function.[9] For a
given type of switch, a larger nonlinear coefficient generally implies a lower required
input control energy and hence a more efficient switch.
Some authors have compared a measure of nonlinearity of materials, such as the
index of refraction’s dependence on the intensity of the incident light, n2, for certain types
of switches (Fig. 1.1 (top)). Figures-of-merit which take into account other factors, such
as the effective absorption length of a switch, or the degree to which diffraction limited
light can be focused, have also been suggested. One such figure-of-merit, n2/��3, is
plotted in Fig. 1.1 (bottom).[10] n2 is a measure of the second-order nonlinearity of the
index of refraction; one expects that switch efficiency will improve with increasing
nonlinearity. On the other hand, the output of the switch degrades as the signal is
absorbed, proportional to the absorption, ���multiplied by interaction length, �,
suggesting a reduction in the figure-of-merit as � and � increase. Finally, the ability to
focus the light to a small spot in order to increase its intensity is limited by diffraction
`which is proportional to �2. This type of figure-of-merit works well for comparing
6
certain switches whose basis for switching is similar (e.g. waveguide switches).
Stegeman and Wright also use a similar figure-of-merit: n2/��.[11]
Figure 1.1: (top) The nonlinear coefficient of the refractive index, n2, as a function of relaxation time (thetime the material needs to recover from a pulse of light), for a variety of materials. (bottom) Afigure-of-merit for switching based on n2 modified for the power used (absorption, ���multiplied byinteraction length, �), and the ability to focus the light to a small spot in order to increase its intensity (�2).Note that the relative strength of certain materials, such as glass, is more prominent for the figure-of-meritthan with n2 alone. (From Ref. [10])
7
Making direct comparisons between wider varieties of switches, however, is
difficult using nonlinear coefficients as a figure-of-merit. Some switches have different
functional dependencies on the same nonlinear susceptibilities. For example, switches
based on sum-frequency mixing are dependent on the square of the second-order
nonlinearity of susceptibility of the material, (�(2))2. Switches based on cascaded second
harmonic generation, however, depend on the fourth power of the second-order
nonlinearity, (�(2))4, and Kerr-like switches are linearly proportional to the third-order
nonlinearity, �(3). Simply knowing the magnitude of �(2) or �(3) is insufficient to
determine which switch is more efficient. For other switches, such as those that are
bi-stable or nonlocal, (e.g., self-electrooptic effect devices (SEEDs)), nonlinear
susceptibilities do not properly describe their switching behavior.ii Finally, for certain
switches (e.g., micro-electro-mechanical systems (MEMS) mirrors) switching is
independent of the material nonlinearity itself. Therefore, another means for making
comparisons is needed.
1.2.2 Switching speed and switching energy comparisonsA simple method for comparing switches is to focus on the desired optical
switching attributes listed earlier. There is an interplay between some of these attributes
(improving one may worsen another) and the specific uses of a switch determine which
characteristics are most important. A switched signal should have a good contrast ratio
(CR) and a large change in the energy in the output beam; many figures-of-merit look at a
combination of these two factors. A high contrast ratio may be obtained by removing the
effective DC floor of the signal, and that may be accomplished by running two signal
streams in a differential configuration. Though slightly more complicated and twice as
energy intensive, this ability suggests that the change in energy of the signal is of more
fundamental importance. If it can be assumed that a certain change of the signal must be
obtained for a particular application, reasonable questions would be: “how much control
signal energy is required to accomplish such switching” and, “how fast would such a
switch operate?” The broad functionality of these two characteristics, switching time and
ii Under certain circumstances, “effective” nonlinear susceptibilities may be determined.[12]
8
switching energy, make them a useful comparison tool for switches. Table 1.1 presents
just such a list where switching energy is defined as the energy required by the device to
enable strong switching operation.
Table 1.1: Comparison of Optical Switch Energies and Repetition Rates *
Type of Switch Repetition Rate (GHz) Enengy (pJ) Reference (~1/switching time)
Electrically-ControlledElectrooptic modulators **
Polymer 40 10 [13]Lithium Niobate 40 28 [6]
40 9 [14]Semiconductor 40 35 [15]
Electroabsorption modulatorsSemiconductor 40 0.9 [16]
50 0.140 [17]Tunable lasers 0.1# 10 # [18]MEMS 2 MHz 0.5 [19]
Optically-ControlledCoherent
OPG 100 5-10 [20]NOLM 640 3.5 [21]Soliton Gate 200 5.8 [22]NLDC 1000 180 [23]Virtual Switches 500 40 [24]
IncoherentFiber-SOA devices 80 0.2 (1.1)*** [25]Waveguide
XGM 100 0.1 (0.9)*** [26]XPM 160 0.05 (1.1)*** [27]XAM 20 6 [28]
Surface-Normal 100 6 [29]
SEED 25 4 [30]
OCOG 50 1.5 [31]
* Table 1.1 presents a representative listing of optical switches only.
** The electrooptic modulators cited here are all travelling-wave modulators.
*** These devices also require significant external power (e.g., SOAs are current-driven forwardbiased diodes). The required optical control power is listed first and the total power is listed inparentheses.
# The values listed here for tunable lasers often are for tuning between two closely spacedwavelengths. Typically, tunable lasers are made to tune across many wavelengths andconsequently tune more slowly and require greater energy.
9
Comparing the total switching energies and speeds (Table 1.1),
electronically-controlled switches are generally slower than optically-controlled devices
as they are limited to the control circuitry speeds. Fiber-based switches, such as soliton
gates and nonlinear optical loop mirrors (NOLMs) can switch very fast but they are bulky
and are difficult to use in large numbers. Recently, optical parametric generation (OPG)
has undergone significant advances particularly with regard to making phase-matching
easier (e.g. using periodically-poled materials). Not only is it fast but is also becoming
low-powered. Switches based on this principle hold great potential. Incoherent
optically-controlled waveguide devices such as semiconductor optical amplifier (SOA)
switches based on cross phase modulation (XPM) are perhaps the best general-purpose
optical switches: they have demonstrated fast, low-powered switching and eve provide
gain; they are, however, generally limited to one-dimensional arrays. Two-dimensional
scaling is readily achieved using surface-normal switches, but most are based on energy-
intensive saturable absorption. Optically controlled optical gates offer both high speed
and low energy switching and are scalable in two dimensions. Moreover, their
optoelectronic nature allows them to be simultaneously integrated with circuitry, a unique
and useful combination.
1.3 SUMMARYThe preceding introduction has attempted to set optically controlled optical gates
(OCOGs) within the larger context of optical switches. The role optical switches play in
enabling the next revolution in communications was highlighted, general switching
principles were established, and key characteristics of optical switches were compared.
Against this background the present thesis addresses the following general
question: What are the limits of optically-controlled optical gates (OCOGs)? Answers to
the follow specific questions are pursued:
∙ What are the underlying physical principles that govern the operation of
OCOG devices and how do they constrain its performance?
∙ What switching energies are required?
∙ How fast can OCOGs operate and over what wavelength range?
10
The remainder of this dissertation is presented in seven additional sections:
(Chapter 2) literature review of optical switches; (Chapter 3) description of the concept of
the optically-controlled optical gate; (Chapter 4) the theory behind OCOG operation;
(Chapter 5) description of the experimental set-up used to test the behavior of OCOGs;
(Chapter 6) results; (Chapter7) simulation details; (Chapter 8) conclusions and thoughts
on directions for future research.
11
REFERENCES
1. Okayasu, M., N. Ishihara, and S. Tohono, "10 Gbit/s 1.3 �m DFB-LD module in0.5cc ceramic package for LAN/MAN applications," Elec. Lett., vol. 37, pp. 303-304 (2001).
2. Peters, F.H. and M.H. MacDougal, "Hihg-Speed High-Temperature Operation ofVerical-Cavity Surface-Emitting Lasers," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 13, pp.645-647 (2001).
3. Steinle, G., et al., "Data transmission up to 10Gbit/s with 1.3 �m wavelengthInGaAsN VCSELs," Elec. Lett., vol. 37, pp. 632-634 (2001).
4. Tomkos, I., et al., "10-Gb/s Transmission of 1.55-�m Directly Modulated Signalover 100 km of Negative Dispersion Fiber," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 13, pp.735-737 (2001).
5. Dagli, N., "Wide-Bandwidth Lasers and Modulators for RF Photonics," IEEETrans. Microwave Theory and Tech., vol. 47, pp. 1151-1171 (1999).
6. Burns, W.K., et al., Low Drive Voltage, 40GHz LiNb03 Modulators in OpticalFiber Communication Conference 1999 & International Conference on IntegratedOptics and Optical Fiber Communication 1999 (OFC/IOOC, 1999).
7. Leclerc, O., et al., "Simultaneously regenerated 4x40Gbit/s dense WDMtransmission over 10,000km using single 40 Ghz InP Mach-Zehnder mondulator,"Elec. Lett., vol. 36, pp. 1574-1575 (2000).
8. Leclerc, O., et al., "40 Gbit/s polarisation-insensitive and wavelength-independentInP Mach-Zehnder modulator for all-optical regeneration," Elec. Lett., vol. 35, pp.730-731 (1999).
9. Haug, H. and S. Schmitt-Rink, "Basic mechanisms of the optical nonlinearities ofsemiconductors near the band edge," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 2, pp. 1135-1142(1985).
10. Walker, A.C., "A comparison of optically nonlinear phenomena in the context ofoptical information processing," Optical Computing and Processing, vol. 1, pp.91-106 (1991).
11. Stegeman, G.I. and E.M. Wright, "All-optical waveguide switching," Optical andQuantum Electronics, vol. 22, pp. 95-122 (1990).
12. Khurgin, J.B., et al., "Cascaded optical nonlinearities: Microscopic understandingas a collective effect," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 14, pp. 1977-1983 (1997).
13. Lee, S.-S., et al., "Optical Intensity Modulator Based on a Novel ElectroopticPolymer Incorporating a High �B Chromophore," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 36,pp. 527-532 (2000).
12
14. Hopfer, S., Y. Shani, and D. Nir, "A Novel, Wideband, Lithium NiobateElectrooptic Modulator," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 16, pp. 73-77 (1998).
15. Sakamoto, S.R., A. Jackson, and N. Dagli, "Substrate Removed GaAs-AlGaAsElectrooptic Modulators," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 11, pp. 1244-1246 (1999).
16. Satzke, K., et al., "Ulrahigh-bandwidth (42 GHz) polarisation-independent ridgewaveguide electroabsorption modulator based on tensile strained InGaAsPMQW," Elec. Lett., vol. 31, pp. 2030-2032 (1995).
17. Kawano, K., et al., "Polarisation-insensitive travelling-wave electrodeelectroabsorption (TW-EA) modulator with bandwidth over 50 GHz and drivingvoltage less than 2V," Elec. Lett., vol. 33, pp. 1580-1581 (1997).
18. Coldren, C., Personal Communication (2001).
19. Solgaard, O., F.S.A. Sandejas, and D.M. Bloom, "Deformable grating opticalmodulator," Opt. Lett., vol. 17, pp. 688-690 (1992).
20. Parameswaran, K., Personal Communication (2001).
21. Yamamoto, T., E. Yoshida, and M. Nakazawa, "Ultrafast nonlinear optical loopmirror for demultiplexing 640 Gbit/s TDM signals," Elec. Lett., vol. 34, pp. 1013-1015 (1998).
22. Islam, M.N., C.E. Soccolich, and D.A.B. Miller, "Low-energy ultrafast fibersoliton logic gate," Opt. Lett., vol. 15, pp. 909-911 (1990).
23. Kang, J.U., G.I. Stegeman, and J.S. Aitchison, "All-optical multiplexing offemtosecond signals using an AlGaAs nonlinear directional coupler," Elec. Lett.,vol. 31, pp. 118-119 (1995).
24. Kan'an, A.M., et al., "1.7-ps Consecutive Switching in an Integrated Multiple-Quantum-Well Y-Junction Optical Switch," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 8, pp.1641-1643 (1996).
25. Kelly, A.E., et al., "80 Gbit/s all-optical regenerative wavelength coversion usingsemicoductor optical amplifier based interferometer," Elec. Lett., vol. 35, pp.1477-1478 (1999).
26. Ellis, A.D., et al., "Error free 100 Gbit/s wavelength conversion using gratingassisted cross-gain modulation in 2mm long semiconductor amplifier," Elec. Lett.,vol. 34, pp. 1958-1959 (1998).
27. Tajima, K., S. Nakamura, and Y. Ueno, "Ultrafast all-optical signal processingwith Symmetric Mach-Zhender type all-optical switches," Optical and QuantumElectronics, vol. 33, pp. 875-897 (2001).
28. Cho, P.S., D. Mahgerefteh, and J. Goldhar, "All-Optical 2R Regeneration andWavelength Conversion at 20 Gb/s Using an Electroabsorption Modulator," IEEEPhot. Tech. Lett., vol. 11, pp. 1662-1664 (1999).
13
29. Loka, H.S. and P.W.E. Smith, "Ultrafast All-Optical Switching with anSymmetric Faby-Perot Device Using Low-Temperature-Grown GaAs: Materialand Device Issues," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 36, pp. 100-111 (2000).
30. Serkland, D.K., et al., Fast-switching symmetric self-electrooptic-effect device at865 nm in CLEO 2000 (Opt. Soc. Am., 2000).
31. Yairi, M.B., H.V. Demir, and D.A.B. Miller, "Optically controlled optical gatewith an optoelectronic dual diode structure - theory and experiment," Optical andQuant. Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1035-1054 (2001).
14
Chapter II: Methods of Optical Switching
Extraordinarily wide varieties of optical switches have been developed: the
mechanisms alone upon which switching is based range from electrical flipping of
mirrors to creation of virtual particles, while their potential uses vary from network
restoration (e.g, if a fiber optic cable is broken) to all-optical logic. Light interacts
with matter usually via the coupling of its electromagnetic wave with electrons. Thus,
it is not so surprising that at the heart of every optical switch lies some means of
(nonlinear) electronic change in the interacting material. Although this dissertation
focuses on one particular type of switch, it is important to know about the other types
of optical switches that have or are currently being investigated and used. Brief
descriptions of a number of representative optical switches are provided below. These
descriptions are organized primarily by switching method: optical-electrical-optical
conversion (OEO), electronic control, optical control, and self-electrooptic effect.
Within these categories, both the principles of operation and characteristics (including
advantages and disadvantages) are provided for each type of switch.i
In Chapter 1 it was suggested that useful parameters for comparing optical
switches are the switching time and energy. These values provide a sense of the
efficiency of the optical switch, although they do not incorporate numerous other
parameters that might be important, such as latency, size, complexity, reliability,
dynamic ranges, sensitivity, or cost. Nevertheless, they do provide a first-order
classification scheme applicable across a wide variety of different types of switches.
Table 1.1 provided this information for a number of different switches, many of which
are described in this chapter.
i The subject matter of the literature review is broad. An attempt has been made to specifically referencecharacteristic early work and occasionally general reviews published for the types of switches described andstate-of-the-art references, particularly when energy and switching times are presented.
15
2.1 OPTICAL-ELECTRICAL-OPTICAL DEVICES (OEOS)Principles of operation
The conversion of optical data to electronic bits and back to optical data is the
primary means by which optical bitstreams are switched and routed today. OEO
switches consist of three components: (1) a receiver for the incoming optical data,
transforming them into an electrical signal, usually a p-i-n photodiode or avalanche
photodiode; (2) electronic circuitry that provides data processing and routing
capability; and (3) a transmitter or transmitters that transform the final electronic
signal into optical data, as is illustrated in Fig. 2.1. These devices are typically edge-
emitting solid state lasers that are either directly modulated or are integrated with
external modulators. [1, 2]
Electronics: 3-R Logic Routing
Photodetector Laser
Figure 2.1: Schematic diagram of an OEO switch. Incoming light is absorbed by a photodetector. Theresulting electrical signal is electronically cleaned-up and processed. A laser or external modulator usesthe final electronic signal to retransmit the incoming data.
Characteristics
One reason OEOs are in wide-spread use today is that they provide a direct
means for inserting intelligence into the switch via electronic logic. This is an easy
task to accomplish in these devices because the signal becomes entirely electronic
during the conversion process. Pulse reshaping, regeneration (in amplitude), and
retiming (the “3 R’s” of signal regenerators) of the electronic signal using electronic
logic are transferable to the re-emitted optical data. Moreover, the data can be time-
division (de)multiplexed while the data are in their electronic form and then be re-
emitted at any wavelength or spatial location as long as the appropriate laser is
electronically accessible.
16
These advantages, however, come at a price. OEOs are limited by the speed of
the electronic circuitry and the rate at which the outgoing data can be modulated.
Typical switching rates are between 1-10 GHz and the circuits are designed to operate
only at a single bit rate.[2-4] The retransmitted bit rate may also be constrained by the
chirp (optical frequency sweeping) placed on the output data, particularly if the lasers
are directly modulated. Additionally, OEOs only switch data that are of a digital,
intensity-modulated format, and will only work with a given data format – they do not
have data format transparency.
One of the most prohibitive disadvantages of OEOs is their cost. The price of
each output laser is of the order of ten thousand dollars, an extremely expensive price
for a single element of a switch if such switches need to be used in large quantities.[5]
New technology under development may eventually lower the price. These include
vertical-cavity surface-emitting lasers (VCSELs),[6] new generations of distributed
feedback (DFB) edge-emitting lasers, and cheaper cooling systems. However, the
limitations discussed here will become more constraining as the bit rate and number of
channels increase, and may result in OEOs giving way to other types of optical
switches. Such OEOs are also in practice difficult to integrate, limiting cost reduction,
because the technologies of the different components are not only disparate but each is
used near its current operating limit.
2.2 ELECTRONICALLY-CONTROLLED OPTICAL SWITCHES
The switches at the moment that offer the stiffest competition to OEOs are
electronically-controlled optical modulators.[7-9] Electronic control provides the
means to interface with electronic logic. This category of devices does not use active
photoemissive elements such as lasers; instead the switch alters the pre-existing bit
stream directly either at a packet or bit level. By leaving the optical data relatively
undisturbed (compared to OEOs), latency and power consumption can be reduced.
Greater data format transparency is also possible. On the other hand, these types of
modulators do not provide 3R ability or the option of wavelength conversion; they are
17
purely space and/or time switches. This type of functionality may be obtained if they
are able to be integrated as part of a more elaborate OEO switch.
2.2.1 Electrooptic modulatorsPrinciples of operation
One of the most common types of electrically-controlled switches are
electrooptic modulators. They come in a variety of waveguide configurations, usually
Mach-Zehnder interferometers (symmetric or asymmetric, with single-arm or two-arm
control[10]) but also coupled waveguides and intersecting X switches. By inducing a
phase shift, usually � radians, in one arm of the switch versus the other, the intensity
of the recombined light at the output port(s) may be controlled.
One basis for changing the phase is the linear electrooptic (Pockels) (2)� effect,
namely, applying an electric field changes the index of refraction of the material as
expressed by (2) 3
0
0 1 2E n rEn � �
� �� � � where r is the appropriate electrooptic tensor
coefficient. In some switches other methods for electrically controlling the relative
phase are also possible. If the (2)� -dependent term is small compared to the (3)
� term,
(3) 20
0 1
En � �
� �� � ; this may occur, for example, in centro-symmetric crystals or in the
presence of large electric fields. Consequently, change in the index of refraction is
proportional to E2, the Kerr effect. Another related phase-shifting mechanism is the
quantum-confined Stark effect (QCSE) – based on (3)� behavior -- in which an
applied electric field strongly shifts the bandedge in a multiple quantum well structure
and hence the index (due to the Kramers-Kronig relationship). Switches may also be
designed based on the index change due to changes in carrier density.[11, 12] This
particular effect is actually often a detrimental side-effect in optical switches because it
adds chirp to the output data bits.
18
V+
_
Figure 2.2: Schematic diagram of an electrically-controlled waveguide interferometric switch. Theincoming light pulse is split at the left-most Y-branch. Changing the voltage, for example, may alter thephase of the bottom-propagating pulse so that it is either in-phase or out-of-phase when it recombineswith the top-propagating pulse at the right-most Y-branch.
There are three principle types of materials used for electrooptic switches:
dielectric, semiconductor, and polymer. For switches based on the Pockels effect, the
electric field needed to induce a � phase shift depends on the nonlinear coefficient r of
the material. Dielectric materials, such as lithium niobate (LiNbO3) typically have
relatively large r, approximately 30 pm/V. This is offset, however, by their smaller
index of refraction n and their larger (low frequency) dielectric constant �, which also
reduces device switching speed.[13, 14] Some organic polymers have similarly large
electrooptic coefficients due to large effective molecular dipoles. Electrooptic
polymer materials are an active area of research; they are potentially capable of very
high-speed modulation at reasonable voltages, and have the added advantage of
fabrication integration with standard electronic circuitry. High power operation,
however, can lead to polymer degradation.[15, 16] The semiconductor material
systems of GaAs/AlGaAs, InGaAsP/InP, and InGaAs/InAlAs have smaller r (e.g., 1.4
pm/V for GaAs) although this is somewhat offset by a larger index of refraction.[17,
18] The QCSE is often a much stronger effect, able to shift the index of refraction one
or two orders of magnitude more than the Pockels effect can given the same electric
field. This electrorefraction is enhanced due to its proximity to the bandgap where it is
resonant. However, this proximity also limits the device length due to band-tail
absorption. In all waveguide devices, residual loss becomes important to consider in
longer waveguides.
19
Electrically-controlled thermooptical devices also fall into this category of
modulators.[19-22] Here, an applied current is passed through a resistor that is
adjacent to part of the waveguide. As the current increases, the resistor heats up. The
phase of the light passing through that arm of the waveguide is altered due to an
expansion of the material and a shift in its temperature-dependent refractive index.
The principle drawback of this type of switch is the relatively slow heating and cooling
periods required – on the order of milliseconds. On the other hand, thermooptic
switches use low voltages and can be used with silica-on-silicon waveguides, making
integration with silicon circuitry potentially significantly easier than optical switches
made of other material.
Characteristics
The energy required to induce sufficient change in phase is determined by the
necessary electric field, the capacitance and resistance of the device, as well as the
electrical driving components. Switching speed is generally limited by the overall RC
time constant of the device as well as the relaxation time of the material.ii Travelling-
wave modulators reduce the switching time by effectively turning on only small
sections of the device at a given time, shrinking the RC time constant. These benefits
come at the cost of greater device complexity .
Electrically-controlled interferometric switches are typically waveguide
devices, making it simple to scale the number of devices made in the lateral direction
(dimension) perpendicular to the waveguides. Such devices can both modulate a
beam and switch it physically from one path to another; when the two arms recombine
out-of-phase, eliminating output in the forward direction, the resulting light instead is
reflected and may be, with proper design, redirected. Another notable characteristic is
low chirp. Finally, coupling between edge-emitting lasers and waveguides in general
is particularly lossy due to the elliptical beam-profile of the laser, although mode
matching can help eliminate some of these effects. The most common type of 10 GHz
ii The relaxation time is the time for the induced dipoles that arise in the presence of the applied field torelax once the field has been removed. In most nonlinear optical materials this is very rapid.
20
external modulator currently commercially available is an electooptic lithium niobate
Mach-Zehnder modulator.
2.2.2 Electro-absorption modulatorsPrinciples of operation
Electro-absorption modulators are another type of electrically-controlled
optical switch.[23, 24] An applied field electric field changes the absorption of the
device, directly modulating the transmission of the optical datastream. Consequently,
the beam path does not need to be split and recombined (as it does for an
interferometer). These devices are typically reverse-biased p-i-n diodes whose
intrinsic region is either bulk semiconductor, in which case the absorption shift is due
to the Franz-Keldysh effect, or is made of multiple quantum wells, in which case the
quantum confined Stark effect (QCSE) provides the switching mechanism. The
physical design of this type of switch is more flexible than that of waveguide
interferometers, since both waveguide and surface-normal devices (including those
that use Fabry-Perot resonances to enhance their switching behavior[25]) are possible.
Characteristics
The limitations of electroabsorption devices are similar to those of
interferometers. The RC time constant of the switch and driving circuitry limit the speed
and increase switching energy. The primary difference between the two categories lies in
the magnitude of the electric field that needs to be applied. Generally speaking, the
energy required to obtain complete switching (e.g., 10 dB contrast ratio (CR)) is
significantly lower than for electrooptic devices, although heat dissipation may be a
concern in this type of switch. One advantage compared to interferometers is that the
device design is simpler. Additionally, there is no oscillatory behavior of the switch with
increasing switching energy, allowing a larger dynamic range for the control energy (in
electrooptic devices, applying too large a field results in a greater than � phase shift,
reducing the modulation depth). Electroabsorption devices cannot, however, easily
switch a beam from one path to another, though there are some clever exceptions.[26, 27]
21
2.2.3 Other voltage-controlled devicesOther electrically-controlled switches include MEMS mirrors and liquid crystal
modulators.
2.2.3.1 MEMS mirrors
Principles of operation
Micro-electronic-mechanical systems (MEMS) mirrors are lithographically-
defined micro-mirrors. Depending on the specific design, an applied voltage typically
translates or rotates mirrors. As a consequence, an incoming beam of light may be
directed to a new spatial location. MEMS mirrors are usually broadband, capable of
reflecting all of the wavelength channels that may be present in the incident light.
Characteristics
The dimensions of MEMS mirrors vary a great deal in size, from around 15x15
�m for display devices to 500x500 �m for cross-bar switches.[28, 29] The
corresponding capacitance combined with large switches voltages (e.g., 100V) results
in large switching energies (~4000 pJ). Switching time is limited by the mechanical
resonance of the switch and is generally on the order of milliseconds. Some MEMS
mirrors, based on modifying a grating or resonance structure instead of moving the
entire mirror in order to modify the beam, can have MHz switching rates.[30-32] On
the other hand, although they are far too slow to switch individual bits, MEMS mirrors
may switch long packets of data or be used for restoration in a network. Switching is
format independent, low loss, scalable in two dimensions, and practically cross-talk
free.
2.2.3.2 Liquid Crystals and Photorefractive Materials
Principles of operation
Another method of electrically controlling light is by applying a voltage to a liquid
crystal. The molecules in a liquid crystal each have a dipole and thus rotate when an
electric field is applied across them, changing the index of refraction of the crystal and its
22
polarizing effects. These changes may be used in a variety of ways for optical
switching.[33, 34] For example, without an electric field the molecules become
randomly oriented, providing an index of refraction that is an average of the ordinary and
extraordinary indicies of the material (n0 and ne). When an electric field is applied, the
molecules orient themselves and thus the index of refraction for normally incident light
becomes, say, n0. This change in index with field can be used, for example, to make an
index-grating-based mirror become strongly reflecting in one state or transparent in
another. Alternatively, by pre-biasing the crystal with one electric field and then
controlling a second field perpendicular to the first, the orientation of the molecules shift,
providing an electrically-controlled polarizer. When combined with passive external
polarizers, this can be used as an efficient means for directing the outgoing light.
Characteristics
Generally, liquid crystals require switching times between micro- to milliseconds,
limited by the time it takes for the molecules to reorient themselves when the field
changes. The voltages required vary, too, but can range up to 100s of volts. On the
positive side, liquid crystals tend to be cheap to manufacture and scale well in one and
two-dimensional arrays.[33]
There are also electrically-controlled diffraction gratings that can be created in
photorefractive crystals, such as in para-electric crystals (e.g. KLTN) -- such devices
have an index of refraction proportional to the square of the electric field. These switches
have significantly faster switching times, on the order of nanoseconds, and are used in
commercial systems (Trellis Photonics).[35]. Also, acousto-optic and magneto-optic
effects in crystals can similarly be used to create, say, a diffraction grating that may be
used for optical switching.[36]
2.3 OPTICALLY-CONTROLLED SWITCHES
Optically-controlled switches change their state due to either an optical control
signal or the intensity of the optical data signal itself; no electronic control is required.
Two broad categories of all-optical switches are “coherent” and “incoherent” switches.
23
The former uses only virtual (transient) electronic properties whereas the latter
involves absorption and the creation of real charge carriers.
2.3.1 Coherent switchesCoherent switches are all-optical devices whose switching function is primarily
governed by phase-dependent interactions between electric fields of the optical beams.
Several types fall under this category, including optical parametric generation,
nonlinear optical loop mirrors, soliton gates, nonlinear coupled mode devices, and
virtual gates.
2.3.1.1 Optical Parametric Generation (OPG)
Principles of operation
An archetype of coherent switches is the general category of those based on
optical parametric generation, a physical process where photons at certain wavelengths
are coherently absorbed in a material and re-emitted at a different wavelength. The
switch produces an output (either generating or depleting a signal) in a
communication channel at a wavelength different from the control beam. Such a
process is possible due to the nonlinear response of certain materials to an electric
field of the incident light. This nonlinearity is well stated by a complex dielectric
coefficient that depends on a power-series expansion:� � � � � �� �1 2 3 2
0( ) 1 ( ) ( ) ( ) ...E E� � � � � � � � �� � � � �
Because parametric processes typically operate far from the resonant frequency
of the device’s material, the dielectric coefficient is largely real. There is little
incoherent (loss of phase information) absorption of light. The incident wavelengths
of light are virtually absorbed as the light interacts with the material, creating a driving
field at new frequencies. Under the proper circumstances, the excited material relaxes
by coherently emitting photons at a new frequency or frequencies instead of at the
original wavelength.
24
�input
�pump�new
Nonlinear Material
Figure 2.3: Schematic illustration of optical parametric generation using, say, PPLN. The input datasignal at �input propagates with a strong c.w. beam at �pump. As they propagate in the nonlinear material,an identical data stream is generated at a new wavelength, �new= 2��pump����input� The input and newwavelength data streams are phase-matched to each other so that as they propagate the power of the newsignal continues to grow. In this figure, the different colored sections in the material are differently-poled regions of lithium niobate that enable quasi-phase matching to be maintained.
Several types of potential nonlinear interactions are possible, though usually
only one is dominant. Depending on the specific materials and wavelengths selected,
different susceptibilities dominate the dielectric coefficient, determining the behavior
of the switch. When the second-order nonlinearity �(2) is the leading term, several
processes, including second harmonic generation (�’=�1+�1), difference frequency
mixing (�’=�1-�2), and sum frequency mixing (�’=�1+�2), may be used to encode
data into a new channel. Third-order nonlinearity �(3) provides additional wavelength
combinations, such as (�’=�1+�1+�2) or (�’=�1+�1-�1) through 4-wave mixing. [37-
39] Second-order nonlinearities may also be cascaded to create effective third-order
processes (e.g., �’=�1+�1, followed by �’’=��’-�1). [40, 41] This is useful when a
third-order type of functionality is desired but otherwise difficult to achieve because
the material has predominately a second order nonlinearity (as in LiNbO3).
Characteristics
In some respects parametric-based optical switches are ideal devices. Their
switching time is nearly instantaneous and very short-lived, so that switching rates are
only limited by the pulse length. High switching (conversion) efficiencies are
possible, particularly with waveguide configurations.iii [42] In passive devices, almost
no excess noise is added to the signal. The primary limitation in OPG devices is the
need for phase-matching between the incident and generated light. This may be
25
compensated by using such quasi-phase-matching techniques as periodically-polling
ferroelectric materials like LiNbO3 (PPLN),[43] or using bonding or regrowth
techniques for semiconductor material systems such as GaAs.[44, 45] Frequency
mixing in active devices, such as semiconductor optical amplifiers, have the
disadvantage of introducing amplified spontaneous emission; on the other hand, phase-
matching requirements are significantly relaxed due to their relatively high conversion
efficiency and resulting short required interaction lengths.[38, 39, 46] Other
limitations include frequency-matching requirements: the generated/modified
wavelength has a one-to-one relationship given particular input wavelengths.
Switching one wavelength arbitrarily to another is not easily accomplished. Finally,
group velocity walk-off restricts the pulse-length (and its associated pulse bandwidth)
and the length of the device that may be used.
2.3.1.2 Nonlinear Optical Loop Mirrors (NOLM)
Principles of operation
Another switch based on coherent interaction between light pulses is the
nonlinear optical loop mirror.[47] For these and other interferometic all optical
devices, switching is often accomplished by making use of (3)� response (the Kerr
effect) of a material. Because (3) 2
0
0 1
En � �
� �� � and the intensity of light is
proportional to E2, the change in index is proportional to the intensity of the incident
light. NOLMs themselves are optically-switched Sagnac interferometers. Incoming
light is split into two pulses via a coupler, and each of the resulting beams propagates
in opposite directions, clockwise (cw) and counter-clockwise (ccw) around a loop of
fiber (typical (3)� in glass ~ 10-15 cm2/W), recombining back at the coupler. If they
are in-phase when they intersect, the recombined light exits primarily down the output
port. If they are out-of-phase, they recombine and exit back along the input port. A
iii As with many optically-controlled switches, switching energy is not well-defined since the efficiency ofthe switch, and hence the energy required, changes with pulse length. We assume here that pulse length,when appropriate, will be on the order of picoseconds.
26
relative � phase shift may be obtained via self-phase modulation if an unbalanced
coupler is used.[47] Alternatively, the phase of one of the propagating signal pulses in
the fiber loop could be changed due to the presence of a copropagating control pulse
via cross-phase modulation. Control pulses of either different wavelengths[48, 49] or
different polarizations[50] allow smooth decoupling from signal pulses. Moreover,
using a control pulse allows a balanced (50/50) coupler to be used, maximizing the
potential contrast ratio of the device. Care must be taken so that the difference in
signal and control propagation velocities does not result in too short a walk-off
distance, limiting the duration of cross-phase modulation. Soliton pulses may also be
used in NOLMs.[51]
Characteristics
Switch latency is determined by the length of the fiber loop, typically on the
order of several hundred meters. Shorter lengths are possible but generally come at the
expense of higher switching energies. Repetition rate is limited by the pulse length
and, if there is walk-off between signal and control pulses, the separation time that
grows between them.iv
2.3.1.3 Soliton Gates
Principles of operation
Soliton gates are nearly perfect all-optical switches, exhibiting most of the
desired characteristics for optical switching and logic. The propagation of the electric
field of light through nonlinear material may be described by a nonlinear Schroedinger
wave equation. In glass fiber, the Kerr-nonlinearity (intensity-dependent index of
refraction) is accounted for by adding a third-order term with a coupling constant
proportional to n2 (a (3)� term). The steady-state solution in which the pulse shape
iv Repetition rate may also be limited by different signal pulses affecting each other. Normally the controland the counter-propagating signal pulses’ interaction is ignored due to the short overlap time; the same isassumed for a signal pulse and any other counter-propagating signal pulses in the loop (particularly sincethe signal pulses are typically much weaker than the control pulse, and hence have an even smaller effect).Nevertheless, if the loop is long, it may be filled with sufficient pulses that such effects significantlydegrade switching. By limiting the repetition rate this degradation may be avoided.
27
remains constant in time as it propagatesv is known as a temporal, or Kerr, soliton. vi
[56, 57] Soliton pulses do not disperse as they propagate and hence will not spread out
and run into each other. Consequently, very high-bit rate pulse streams may be
envisioned.vii Soliton velocity itself is dependent on amplitude, wavelength, and, if the
medium is birefringent, polarization.
time
without control pulse
t=t0+�t“0”
Arrival time at photodetector
t=t0time
with control pulse
“1”
Figure 2.4: Switching behavior of a soliton dragging gate. As a soliton signal pulse travels down afiber, if a faster control soliton pulse is also present for part of the time, the control pulse will “walkthrough” the signal soliton, temporarily speeding up the signal while slowing down itself while they areoverlapped. As a result, the arrival time of the signal pulse at a photodetector at the end of the fiber willbe sooner (e.g., time t=t0) with a control pulse than without (t=t0+�t).
Soliton gates function by switching the temporal location of a soliton within a
given clock cycle. Solitons interact with each other in an intriguing manner, coupled
together via the nonlinear term of the Schroedinger equation. In birefringent fiber,
given two solitons of different polarization (and hence velocity), one will pass through
the other if timed properly. When traveling in the same direction and near to each
other, they “attract” each other, temporarily slowing the faster soliton and speeding up
v The index of refraction increases with intensity due to Kerr nonlinearity, and so the higher intensity partsof a pulse (e.g. the middle) travel slower than the lower intensity parts (front and back). The time derivativeof phase equals frequency. Consequently, the slowing phase velocity in front half of pulse results in aneffective negative frequency shift, while there is a positive frequency shift in the back At the same time,negative group velocity dispersion (GVD) makes lower frequencies propagate more slowly than higherfrequencies. When both effects are present, they may balance for certain pulse shapes, and the pulse shapeis maintained as the pulse propagates.vi By balancing the Kerr nonlinearity with the electrooptic effect (change of the index of refraction linearlydependent on the electric field), “spatial solitons” may be created.[52-54] Such solitons are confined, forexample, in one dimension, creating waveguides. Spatial solitons interact in a similar manner to temporalsolitons, attracting or repelling each other, and these effects may be used for switching, too. [55] Theseeffects are due to real absorption of light to create free charge carriers able to move and thus locally changethe electric field (and thus it is not a coherent effect).vii Research into long-haul high-bit rate soliton transmission has been a vibrant field, though not directlyrelevant to this thesis. References, [56],[54] are a good starting point. At present, the ability to transmit80 GBps over trans-oceanic distances (10,000 km) has been demonstrated.[58]
28
the slower soliton. This is referred to as soliton dragging.viii A special case of soliton
dragging, known as soliton trapping, occurs when such mutual attraction is sufficient
to keep two solitons trapped together as they propagate. “Billiard-ball”-like
interactions (elastic collisionsix) are also possible given two solitons traveling in
opposite directions with different group velocities. [59, 60] In this case, the solitons
are displaced away from each other in time. Soliton self-switching based on the
soliton self-frequency shift (dependent on the soliton pulse’s intensity) has also been
demonstrated.[61]
Characteristics
All-optical switches based on soliton interactions have been demonstrated.[59]
Making use of soliton dragging, a switching energy of 5.8 pJ operating at bit rates of
0.2 THz was demonstrated.[62] This switch has also demonstrated the feasibility of
using soliton gates for optical logic systems. It was cascadable, provided logic level
restoration and timing, and performed logic functions, and allowed good input/output
isolation. One drawback, as with most soliton switches, was the over 400 m of fiber
required. Consequently, those switches not only are physically large but also incur
significant latency. With specially made fiber, a low-latency switch reduced this
length to 50 m though the switching energy was larger (40 pJ).[63]
2.3.1.4 Nonlinear coupled mode devices
Principles of operation
“Nonlinear coupled mode devices” capture a broad category of coherent all-
optical switches.[64] A (non-resonant) control pulse changes the index of refraction
of part of the switch. This index change switches the signal pulse between two ports
or modulates the signal pulse at a single port. Mach-Zehnder interferometers, coupled
waveguides, and X-switches all may fall under this heading. The nonlinear directional
coupler (NLDC) is a classic example.[65, 66] In this device, two waveguides are viii Similar behavior occurs given two solitons of the same polarization but different wavelengths.Depending on the relative phase, the solitons slow or speed each other up.
29
brought sufficiently close together so that the evanescent electric fields of light in one
waveguide overlap and couple with the other waveguide. The coupling results in the
optical intensity oscillating back and forth between the two waveguides as it
propagates. The coupling length is defined to be the distance light needs to propagate
in the coupled system to fully shift into the other waveguide; typical values are of the
order of millimeters in semiconductors. If the initial intensity of the light is
sufficiently high (or a control beam is present to create a comparable effect), the shift
in the index of refraction due to the waveguide material’s nonlinearity, 0 2n n I n� � ,
results in “walkoff”, preventing the evanescent field in the other waveguide from
building up. Hence, at low powers an NLDC acts as a switch that shifts the beam to
the other waveguide, while at high powers little switching occurs. Because the
coupling and nonlinearities involved are all due solely to the electric fields of light,
switching occurs on the order of femtoseconds, though there is latency. Other coupled
mode devices use the same nonlinear dependence on the intensity as the basis for their
switches as well.[67]
Characteristics
Some NLDC devices used wavelengths below half the bandgap of AlGaAs to
enable switching at 1.55 �m to avoid parasitic two-photon absorption creating long-
lived charge carriers.[68] This came at a cost of a weaker nonlinearity that required a
greater switching energy, and generally speaking it has been difficult to obtain large
contrast ratios. Fiber-based NLDCs using dual-core fiber with soliton pulses offered
reduced parasitic absoprtion while avoiding pulse break-up and distortion.[69]
ix Soliton collisions along the same (polarizing) axis may be described by nonlinear Schroedinger equationswhich are fully integrable, and hence are “elastic,” unlike soliton dragging gates whose coupled equationsare not integrable.
30
2.3.1.5 Virtual switches
Principles of operation
Virtual switches are another form of coherent optical gates, making explicit use
of virtual carriersx as well as the energy band structure of semiconductors. An incident
control light detunedxi from the absorption resonance couples with the material only
during the duration of the pulse, providing a short-lived nonlinear behavior. The
coupling between photons and electrons may result in new eigenstates of the system,
shifting the resonant energy levels – an optical Stark effect (also referred to as the AC
Stark effect or dynamic Stark effect).[70-72] This shift changes the absorption and
index of refraction near the frequency of a signal beam, hence providing a switching
mechanism. At sufficiently high intensities, virtual excitons may also switch the
signal by bleaching the absorption.
Characteristics
The fast speed and potentially strong switching behavior of virtual switches are
offset by their high switching energies because the non-resonant interaction is a weak
effect. Devices with 1-2 picosecond gating times with limited contrast ratios (between
2-5:1) have been demonstrated with switching energies between 1-10 pJ/�m2.[73, 74]
Parasitic absorption below the band-gap (e.g. Urbach tail or two-photon absorption)
created long-lived carriers that also reduced the switching efficiency.xii
2.3.2. Incoherent switchesIncoherent all-optical switches are the complement to the coherent modulators
described above. Broadly speaking, incoherent switches function by absorbing an
incoming optical control pulse, creating electrons and holes. These charge carriers, in
x Virtual carriers are photo-excited carriers that remain phase coherent with the incident light pulse. Theyare able to relax, re-emitting light in phase with the original pulse. Because the carriers are usually notpresent in their excited state after the light pulse passes by, they are referred to as “virtual” particles.xi In semiconductor material systems, light is detuned to be below the absorption band so that it is notabsorbed.xii A related device has been suggested based on virtual charge screening. [75] With a DC applied biasacross a MQW stack, a slightly detuned below band-gap incident light beam could create virtual electronsand holes that would separate slightly within a quantum well, screening the field and hence changing therefractive index properties of the system (e.g. in essence a virtual quantum-confined Stark effect).
31
turn, alter the optical properties of the device and are thus responsible for the
switching behavior. The switching response can be quite strong, but the response time
of the devices is now limited by charge carrier response times and lifetimes.
2.3.2.1 SOAs in Fiber Loop Mirrors (SLALOM, TOAD)
Principles of operation
TOADs and SLALOMs are implementations of incoherent switches based on
the incorporation of semiconductor optical amplifiers (SOAs) into fiber loop mirrors.
A semiconductor optical amplifier is placed off-center in an optical fiber loop mirror.
In the presence of a control pulse or intense signal pulse, light is absorbed in sufficient
amounts to create enough photogenerated carriers to significantly alter the index of
refraction of the SOA via cross-phase modulation (e.g., by saturation) – this is the
carrier density induced index change mentioned before. Referred to as SLALOMs
(semiconductor laser amplifier in a loop mirror), or in some circumstances TOADs
(terahertz optical asymmetric demultiplexer), it was demonstrated that a � relative
phase change between two counterpropagating pulses could occur in a few hundred
microns instead of many meters of fiber optic cable, as is needed by NOLMs.[76-79]
SOA
4-port device(50/50 coupler)
Signal Control
“0”“1”
Figure 2.5: Schematic diagram of a terahertz optical asymmetric demultiplexer (TOAD). The incomingsignal pulse is split at the 50/50 coupler into two counterpropagating pulses. Depending on the presenceor absence of a properly timed control pulse’s effect on the off-center SOA, imposing different phaseshifts to the signal pulses, the pulses will recombine either in-phase or out-of-phase. As a result, therecombined signal pulse will either continue to propagate along the fiber in its original direction or itreturn back along the fiber, respectively.
32
Characteristics
The principle advantage of SLALOMs and TOADs over NOLMs is a
dramatically reduced size and hence latency. Also, they may be integrated with
electronic circuitry. Extremely fast demultiplexing rates are possible (e.g.
250 GHz [80]). The repetition rate is constrained, however, by the recovery time of
the SOA, typically on the order of 100s of picoseconds to nanoseconds.[79] A few
methods have been developed to overcome this limitation, reducing the recovery time
to the order of a few to tens of picoseconds (these methods include operating at
transparency current, and hence minimal absorption; injecting a cw “holding” beam to
enhance recombination[81]; or designing a symmetric system to equalize the arms
using an additional pulse but also reducing the operating nonlinearity). Another useful
feature is that the control pulse may be of a different polarization or wavelength,
making it easy to separate from the signal and also enabling polarization or wavelength
switching.
2.3.2.2 Semiconductor Waveguides
A wide array of semiconductor waveguide devices may be used as incoherent
optically-controlled switches. Because the gain or absorption in a semiconductor can
be quite sensitive to the carrier density, changes in intensity from a control bitstream
can be used to modulate the characteristics of the semiconductor so that the bitstream
can be imprinted on another optical channel. Cross-gain, cross-phase, and cross-
absorption modulation (XGM, XPM, and XAM) are the common types of switches
and are described below.
Principles of operation
If a semiconductor is forward biased it can potentially be used as a
semiconductor optical amplifier (SOAs).[82, 83] SOA all-optical switches may
function by interacting with a control beam of light (e.g. providing amplification)
which changes the remaining electron and hole density of the material, altering its
complex index of refraction.[84] If it is primarily the gain which is affected (reduced)
33
by the signal pulse, the switch is referred to as a cross-gain modulator. On the other
hand, cross-phase modulators (XPMs) rely on a change in the index of refraction.
SOA
Control beam blockCW signal beam
Control beam
Output signal data
Figure 2.6: A schematic illustration of cross-grain modulation in an SOA. The incoming c.w. signalbeam is amplified as it passes through the SOA. However, when the control beam is present, it too isamplfied, reducing the gain available for the CW beam. As a result, the inverse data stream of thecontrol beam becomes imprinted onto the signal beam. In this illustration the control beam is at adifferent wavelength than the signal and is therefore may be blocked with an appropriate filter.
If the semiconductor is reverse biased, changes in the gain are no longer possible.
However, the control pulses can instead be absorbed. This, too, changes the carrier
concentration. This can be used, for example, to separate the photogenerated carriers,
changing the voltage, and thus the absorption.[85]
It is important to mention that optically-induced changes due to carrier absorption
may also be induced in waveguides (particularly MQW devices) by other nonlinear
processes, such as band-filling and other absorption-saturation phenomena, altering the
dielectric coefficient. Such effects can be used to alter the phase of the signal beam (such
as two-photon absorption-induced changes in the index of refraction) or its intensity.[86]
Characteristics
Fully switching cross-gain modulators typically require carrier densities near
the saturation level of the device material and devices that are several hundred microns
long. Switching energies of 0.8 pJ per bit at 40 Gbits/s have been demonstrated.[87]
Cross-phase modulators may require significantly less switching energy than XGMs
because only a � phase shift is needed. Additionally, the smaller optical control signal
results in a correspondingly smaller chirp that is added to the signal. For example,
100 GHz XPM wavelength conversion has been demonstrated using only 125 fJ per
pulse.[88] On the down side, XPMs are more sensitive to the control power (they
have a smaller input power dynamic range) since excess energy adds too much phase
shift and require more complicated waveguide configurations such as interferometers.
34
XAMs also require less power than XGMs. However, cross-absorption modulation
can have significant parasitic absorption, resulting in much smaller output powers than
XGMs or XPMs.
2.3.2.3 Surface-Normal, Optically-controlled Switches
Principles of operation
Surface-normal, optically-controlled switches differ from the previously
described devices in that the optical control and signal beams are incident from the top
of the device (perpendicular to the surface) instead of from the side. The interaction
lengths of such devices are limited to a few microns due to the surface-normal
geometry. Hence, strong intensity-dependent nonlinearity is needed in order to switch
the device. One class of devices uses nonlinear absorption and, possibly, nonlinear
refraction associated with absorption saturation effects. This is accomplished by
operating near the band-edge of a semiconductor where the complex index of
refraction’s nonlinear dependence on detuning, gapE �� � , becomes large although
predominantly imaginary and hence absorbing. A strong control pulse can be
absorbed, creating carriers that saturate the absorption, reducing the absorption until
the carriers recombined. Hence, during that time the signal is more strongly
transmitted; the switch is “on”. As the saturation relaxes, the switch turns off. The
original research on this type of all-optical switch was first done by Takahashi, et. al.
[89]. Work progressed with MQW InGaAs/InAlAs devices[90, 91] and bulk GaAs,
too.[92, 93]
Characteristics
The standard characteristics of this type of device are strongly influenced by
the surface-normal geometry. The thin intrinsic region seen by the light pulses makes
it difficult to achieve a large contrast ratio (CR). This can be overcome by the use of
an internal DBR mirror to make the device reflection-based, both doubling the
effective active region’s thickness and allowing the overall reflectivity of the device to
be tailored so that it becomes a low-finesse asymmetric Fabry-Perot cavity. This can
provide nearly zero reflectivity in its “off” state, allowing large CR while maintaining
35
a bandwidth of about 40 nm.[93] Saturable absorption has a lifetime on the order of
nanoseconds. However, the use of low temperature-grown and Be-implanted GaAs
(LT-GaAs) can reduce the lifetime of the photoexcited carriers to picoseconds,
significantly enhancing the switch recovery time. Surface-normal devices tend to be
smaller than waveguide devices and easily scale in two dimensions to NxN formats.
They also avoid the tight alignment requirements of waveguide devices. Moreover,
there is no polarization dependence due to the planar symmetry with respect to the
light.xiii
2.3.2.4 Bistable Devices
Another type of all-optical switch is a bistable device – a device in which for
some (optical) control inputs there are two possible (optical) outputs. Which of the
two output states is produced depends on the history of the device. Moreover, small
changes in input power can result in changing from one state of the device to another
and thereby creating a large change in, say, the output power. This is a type of signal
gain.
xiii Actually, there was polarization dependence. The switches were sufficiently fast that the spin-state of theexcited electrons (which decays on the order of a few picoseconds) was still correlated with polarization ofthe pump light pulse. [89]) Such an effect becomes much less pronounced with a slower surface-normalswitch.
36
Out
put p
ower
Input power
1
2
3
4
StableUnstable
Voltage
Cur
rent
V0
Figure 2.7: Hypothetical response of a bistable device – a reverse biased p-i(MQW)-n photodiode inseries with a resistor. (Fig. 2.7b, LEFT) Load-line analysis of the coupled equations of the system. Thestraight line is related to the current/voltage relationship of the resistor while the curving line describesthe absorption (and hence photocurrent) of the MQW diode. Note that increased current implies greaterabsorption and so lower output power. As the input power rises, the diagonal load line increases itsangle with respect to the voltage axis where its intercept is pinned by the overall bias across the system,V0. By tracing out the stable points, a curve similar to Fig. 2.7b can be created. (Fig 2.7a, RIGHT)Output light power as a function of input light power. For certain input powers the output power can below (1) or high (3) depending on if the input power was previously low (and rising) or high (but falling),respectively. The sharp nonlinear responses at (2) and (4) enable large changes in output power withrelatively small changes in input power.
Typically, bistable devices rely on some form of feedback to achieve their
strong nonlinear and dual-state behavior. Such a system may be one that obeys two
separate but coupled differential equations whose solutions are the bistable points.
One example of this could be a device based on nonlinear refraction (the index of
refraction, and hence the path length, is a function of intensity) placed inside a
resonant cavity (whose transmission, and hence intensity, is dependent on the path
length between its ends). Here path length in the cavity depends on intensity in the
nonlinear device, but the intensity in the nonlinear device depends on the transmission
of the cavity that in turn depends on the path length – a feedback loop. “The
bistability then arises from the simultaneous conditions that the optical length of the
nonlinear material depends on the intensity of the lights in the resonator, and that the
intensity of light in a resonator depends on its optical length. This bistability results in
a hysteresis and switching in the behavior of the transmitted light intensity.” [94]
Positive feedback can drive this system to either a high or a low output state (the
bistable points) and dynamically what results is a hysteresis loop. With c.w. incident
37
light, a reverse-biased p-i(MQW)-n photodiode (with transparent substrate) in series
with a resistor is another example (see Fig. 2.7).
A large number of bistable passive devices based on a wide variety of
microscopic mechanisms have been studied.[95] The principle driving force behind
this work was the desire for a useful optical logic gate. Generally speaking, bistable
devices were limited in this regard due to their lack of a cheap and compact manner to
cascade them.
2.4 SELF-ELECTROOPTIC-EFFECT DEVICES (SEEDS)Self-electrooptic-effect devices (SEEDs) are another class of semiconductor
optically controlled optical switches whose switching behavior is due to
photogenerated charged carriers. The nonlinear switching of SEEDs is distinct from
the previously discussed optical switches, however, in that it is a non-local
phenomenon. That is, the device area for the signal datastream affected by the
photogenerated carriers may be physically distinct from the area where the control
light interacts with the device.xiv Furthermore, SEEDs may operate as bistable
switches, an intrinsically multi-valued nonlinear behavior that is not possible to
express by a power-series expansion (power series are inherently single-valued) of the
xiv The nonlinearity of SEEDs is different from the local material nonlinearity of the dielectric coefficient.Having said this, some aspects of SEED behavior have been described using an effective 3rd-ordernonlinearity. [96-98] The photogenerated carriers of the control beam create an electric field as theyseparate under bias. This may be viewed as a 2nd-order difference-frequency mixing effect, creating a DC(�’=�control-�control=0) field. This field then interacts with the signal beam (�’’=�signal+�’=��signal),modifying the dielectric coefficient to change, say, the absorption. This cascaded �(2) effect, or equivalent�
(3) functionality, may be quite large since the photogenerated carriers are able to move, creating very largeeffective dipole moments by adding their fields in concert. The effective �sc
(2) due to separated chargecompared to the local material �(2) may be expressed as:
� �
( 2)
1( 2)
sc r scd
d
� �
� ���
�
where dsc is the dipole due to separated charge, d is the dipole of the medium (e.g. semiconductor material)
due to the electric field of light, �r is the recombination time, and � �1
��� is the inverse linewidth of the
light.
38
dielectric coefficient. SEEDs generally have been designed to interact with surface-
normal light beams (though they also work in waveguides [99]). As a result, devices
on the scale of a few hundred square microns may be used, and large two-dimensional
arrays have been demonstrated.[100] Finally, SEEDs can be integrated with standard
silicon electronics (e.g. CMOS) using processes such as flip-chip bonding.[101] This
allows SEEDs to take advantage of the complex logic that silicon circuitry can
provide.
Vpi (MQW)n
-
+
incident light
output light
R
Figure 2.8: Schematic illustration of an R-SEED.
2.4.1 Principles of operationSEEDs were first invented in the early 1980s.[102] Since that time, there have
been many scientific papers written on the subject as it evolved from a curiosity to a
well-established concept and technology.[98, 103] Most SEEDs are optically sensitive
p-i(multiple quantum well)-n diodes connected with other electronic or optoelectronic
components, including other MQW photodiodes. An illustration of a SEED is
presented in Fig. 2.8. A control beam of light that interacts with the primary p-
i(MQW)-n diode is absorbed, creating photogenerated carriers. These photogenerated
carriers are able to move to other diodes or optoelectronic devices, altering their
absorption properties. If desired, the signal beam may, therefore, be designed either to
interact with the other optoelectronic components of the device than does the control
pulse. The control and signal beams do not need to be near one another.
The key to SEED operation is voltage-dependent absorption. The reverse-
biased MQW region’s heavy-hole exciton absorption peak near the band edge
39
red-shifts with increasing bias due to the quantum confined Stark effect (QCSE).[104]
Because absorption creates charged carriers that can then modify absorption, it is
possible to create circuits with feedback. With proper design, positive feedback can be
used to create bistable systems. Negative feedback, on the other hand, provides the
means to force the inherently nonlinear system to respond linearly to an input signal.
2.4.2 Types of SEEDsR-SEED
The first SEED, demonstrated by Miller et. al., was a p-i(MQW)-n diode
placed in series with a voltage supply and a resistor (see Fig. 2.8).[102] By changing
the input power, the device could be switched from one of the two stable points to the
other, thus changing the reflectivity of the diode. Changing the applied bias similarly
switched the device. Switching speed was RC-limited, and critical parameter settings
(either power or voltage) were needed for relatively low-power switching.
D-SEED
Replacing the resistor with a photodiode offered a wider variety of device
functionality.[105] Compared to the resistor-SEED, this diode-biased SEED
(D-SEED) required a smaller switching energy and was not limited by large RC time
constants. The switching time, however, was still constrained by the charging rate of
the MQW diode. Bistability was more readily achieved and with greater differences
between the two stable states. Moreover, it was possible to make use of negative
differential resistivity to achieve self-linearized modulation (the absorbed power
varied linearly with the imposed current with appropriate initial conditions).
Integrated D-SEED
The SEEDs described so far have a limitation in that not only does the MQW
diode have to be (dis)charged, but that the external circuitry also adds load capacitance
and resistance. Monolithic integration of the photodetector of the D-SEED and the
MQW diode improved these limitations.[106] In one device, the second (control)
diode was grown on top of the first (signal) diode in a p-i-n-p-i-n structure. By
selecting proper layer compositions and optical wavelengths, the control light was
40
absorbed in the top diode while the longer-wavelength signal light passed through to
be absorbed by the lower diode. In the future, this type of integrated D-SEED may be
particularly useful for arrays of devices because it is compact. The OCOG devices
described in this dissertation can be viewed as next-generation integrated D-SEEDs.
S-SEED
Symmetric SEEDs (S-SEEDs) derive their name from the symmetry between
the control and signal diode: both are identical (though usually spatially separate)
p-i(MQW)-n diodes in this type of device.[107] The behavior of the device is
determined by the ratio of the two optical input intensities. Consequently, the state of
the device can be first set using low-power beams, then a large output change is
induced using high-power beams, providing a form of time-sequential gain. S-SEEDs
do not require critical biasing and have good input-output isolation. These qualities
are important characteristics for logic devices that other SEEDs lacked. Indeed, full
cascaded logic functionality was demonstrated using differential logic signals. The
fastest demonstrated SEED switching (turn-on time only) was 6 ps using an S-SEED
with extremely shallow quantum wells to overcome escape and transport across the
MQWs.[108]
T-SEED
It is also possible to incorporate active electronic components into SEEDs. A
beam of light incident on a phototransitor is used to control the current through a
p-i(MQW)-n diode onto which a second beam of light shone. As with other SEEDs,
altering the current changed the absorption of the diode and the transmission of the
light.[109] This was soon followed by a monolithic device using a p-n-p structure
replacing the separate phototransistor.[110] Such a device did not significantly lower
the required switching energy in spite of the gain the phototransistor was able to
provide, largely due to the Miller capacitance effect (where the effective capacitance of
the transistor is multiplied by its gain).[98]
FET-SEED
The FET-SEED bypassed the Miller capacitance limitation.[111] In this
device, the control light beam was absorbed in a vertical p-i(MQW)-n diode. The
41
charged carriers were used to generate a current that induced a change in voltage on
the gate of a field-effect transistor (FET). The resultant drain current modulated the
absorption of a second beam of light. The gain inherent in such a system was
evidenced by only requiring ~0.5 V change due to the input beam compared to ~5 V in
regular SEEDs. It is interesting to note that this work in FET-SEEDs led to integration
with CMOS electronics,[101] which in turn led to work on dense optical
interconnects.[112, 113]
2.4.3 CharacteristicsSEEDs have demonstrated a wide variety of device functionality, including
bistability, self-linearization, gain (using a small signal to effect the reflectivity of a
much larger signal), and logic capability[114], [107]. Most of the devices discussed
above were demonstrated at wavelengths near 850 nm, but SEEDs have also been
made that operate around 1500 nm.[115] Typical operating switching energies of
3-5 fJ/��m-2 were needed, not including the energy dissipation of other circuitry.
Switching time was generally limited by charging or discharging the depletion
capacitance of the MQW diode. There was an inverse relationship between the
switching power and the switching time. The faster the desired rate of switching, the
larger the number of carriers needed at a given moment, hence greater input power was
required. Compared to other all-optical switching technologies the main drawback of
SEEDs is their relatively slow speed, although this has improved signficantly. As
mentioned above, the fastest switching speed obtained was 6 ps.[108] An additional
limitation is that at high photogenerated carrier intensities, about 1012 cm-2 per
quantum well[116], saturation of the exciton absorption peaks becomes a competing
nonlinear process and also slows down device recovery speed.
42
REFERENCES
1. Williams, G.F., Lightwave Receivers, in Topics in Lightwave TransmissionSystems, T. Li, Editor, pp. 79-150 (Academic Press, San Diego, 1991).
2. Dixon, M. and J.L. Hokanson, Optical Transmitter Design, in Topics inLightwave Transmision Systems, T. Li, Editor, pp. 1-78 (Academic Press, SanDiego, 1991).
3. Yasaka, H., et al., "Repated Wavelength Conversion of 10 Gbit/s Signal UsingWavelength-Tunable Semiconductor Lasers," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 7, pp.161-163 (1995).
4. Stubkjaer, K.E., et al., Wavelength Conversion Technology, in PhotonicNetworks, G. Prati, Editor (Springer-Verlag, London, 1997).
5. Yoo, S.J.B., "Wavelength Conversion Technologies for WDM NetworkApplications," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 955-966 (1996).
6. Choquette, K.D. and H.Q. Hou, "Vertical-Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers:Moving from Research to Manufacturing," Proc. IEEE, vol. 85, pp. 1730-1739(1997).
7. Wood, T.H., "Multiple Quantum Well (MQW) Waveguide Modulators," J.Lightwave Tech., vol. 6, pp. 743-757 (1988).
8. Thylen, L., LiNb03 and Semiconductor Guided Wave Optics in Switching andInterconnects, in Photonic switching and interconnects, A. Marrakchi, Editor(Marcel Dekker Inc, New York, 1994).
9. Dagli, N., "Wide-Bandwidth Lasers and Modulators for RF Photonics," IEEETrans. Microwave Theory and Tech., vol. 47, pp. 1151-1171 (1999).
10. Ohno, K., et al., "Design and Characterization of Traveling Wave OpticalModulators of LiNb03 Thin film Waveguides Grown by Liquid Phase Epitaxy,"Elec. and Comm. in Japan, Part 2, vol. 77, pp. 22-31 (1994).
11. Bennett, B.R., R.A. Soref, and J.A.D. Alamo, "Carrier-Induced Change inRefractive Index of InP, GaAs, and InGaAsP," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 26, pp.113-122 (1990).
12. Vinchant, J.-F., et al., "InP/GaInAsP Guided-Wave Phase Modulators Based onCarrier-Induced Effects: Theory and Experiment," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 10, pp.63-70 (1992).
13. Kaminow, I.P., et al., "Thin-film LiNb03 electro-optic light modulator," Appl.Phys. Lett., vol. 22, pp. 540-542 (1973).
43
14. Leonberger, F.J., "High-speed operation of LiNbO3 electro-optic interferometricwaveguide modulators," Opt. Lett., vol. 5, pp. 312-314 (1980).
15. Firton, D.G., et al., "20 GHz electro-optic polymer Mach-Zehnder modulator,"Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 58, pp. 1730-1732 (1991).
16. Dalton, L.R., et al., "From molecules to opto-chips: organic electro-opticmaterials," J. Mater. Chem., vol. 9, pp. 1905-1920 (1999).
17. Walker, R.G., "High-Speed Electrooptic Modulation in GaAs/GaAlAs WaveguideDevices," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. LT-5, pp. 1444-1453 (1987).
18. Takeuchi, H., K. Kasaya, and K. Oe, "Low-Switching-Voltage InGaAsP/InPWaveguide Interferometric Modulator for Integrated Optics," IEEE Phot. Tech.Lett., vol. 1, pp. 227-229 (1989).
19. Haruna, M. and J. Koyama, "Thermooptic effect in LiNbO3 for light deflectionand switching," Elec. Lett., vol. 17, pp. 842-844 (1981).
20. Haruna, M. and J. Koyama, "Thermooptic deflection and switching in glass,"Appl. Opt., vol. 21, pp. 3461-3465 (1982).
21. Takato, N., et al., "Silica-Based Single-Mode Waveguides on Silicon and theirApplication to Guided-Wave Optical Interferometers," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 6,pp. 1003-1010 (1988).
22. Diemeer, M.B.J., J.J. Brons, and E.S. Trommel, "Polymeric Optical WaveguideSwitch Using the Thermooptic Effect," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 7, pp. 449-453(1989).
23. Wood, T.H., et al., "100 ps waveguide multiple quantum well (MQW) opticalmoulator with 10:1 on/off ratio," Elec. Lett., vol. 21 (1985).
24. Wakita, K., et al., "Long-Wavelength Waveguide Multiple-Quantum-Well(MQW) Optical Modulator with 30:1 On/Off Ratio," Elec. Lett., vol. 22, pp. 907-908 (1986).
25. Trezza, J.A., M. Morf, and J.S. Harris, "Creation and Optimization of Vertical-Cavity X-Modulators," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 32, pp. 53-60 (1996).
26. Agahi, F., et al., "Asymmetric Fabry-Perot modulator with a waveguidegeometry," Elec. Lett., vol. 32, pp. 210-212 (1996).
27. Trezza, J.A. and J.S. Harris, "Two-state Electrically Controllable PhaseDiffraction Grating Using Arrays of Vertical-Cavity Phase Flip Modulators,"IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 8, pp. 1211-1213 (1996).
28. Kessel, P.F.V., et al., "A MEMS-based projection display," Proc. of the IEEE,vol. 86, pp. 1687-1704 (1998).
44
29. Lin, L.Y., E.L. Goldstein, and R.W. Tkach, "Free-Space Micromachined OpticalSwitches for Optical Networking," IEEE J. Selected Topics Quant. Elec., vol. 5,pp. 4-9 (1999).
30. Solgaard, O., F.S.A. Sandejas, and D.M. Bloom, "Deformable grating opticalmodulator," Opt. Lett., vol. 17, pp. 688-690 (1992).
31. Goossen, K.W., J.A. Walker, and S.C. Arney, "Silicon Modulator Based onMechanically-Active Antri-Reflection Layer with 1 Mbit/sec Capability for Fiber-in-the-Loop Applications," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 6, pp. 1119-1121 (1994).
32. Walker, J.A., et al., "A 1.5 Mb/s Operation of a MARS Device forCommunications Systems Applications," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 2382-2386 (1996).
33. Neff, J.A., R.A. Athale, and S.H. Lee, "Two-Dimensional Spatial LightModulators: A Tutorial," Proc. of the IEEE, vol. 78, pp. 826-855 (1990).
34. Bunning, T.J., et al., "Holographic Polymer-Dispersed Liquid Crystals (H-PDLCs)," Ann. Rev. Mater. Sci., vol. 30, pp. 83-115 (2000).
35. Agranat, A.J., et al., The Electroholographic Optical Switch (Trellis Photonics,2000).
36. Tsai, C.S., "Integrated Acoutooptic and Magnetooptic Devices for OpticalInformation Processing," Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 84, pp. 853-870 (1996).
37. Inoue, K. and H. Toba, "Wavelength Conversion Experiment Using Fiber Four-Wave Mixing," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 4, pp. 69-72 (1992).
38. Geraghty, D.F., et al., "Wavelength Conversion for WDM CommunicationSystems Using Four-Wave Mixing in Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers," IEEEJ. Selected Topics Quant. Elec., vol. 3, pp. 1146-1155 (1997).
39. D'Ottavi, A., et al., "Four-Wave Mixing in Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers: APractical Tool for Wavelength Conversion," IEEE J. Selected Topics Quant. Elec.,vol. 3, pp. 522-528 (1997).
40. Chou, M.H., et al., "Efficient Wide-Band and Tunable Midspan Spectral InverterUsing Cascaded Nonlinearities in LiNbO3 Waveguides," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett.,vol. 12, pp. 82-84 (2000).
41. Kanbara, H., et al., "All-Optical Switching Based on Cascading of Second-OrderNonlinearities in a Periodically Poled Titanium-Diffused Lithium NiobateWaveguide," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 111, pp. 328-330 (1999).
42. Parameswaran, K.R., et al., "Low-Power All-Optical Gate Based on SumFrequency Mixing in APE Waveguides in PPLN," Photon. Tech. Lett., vol. 12, pp.654-656 (2000).
45
43. Myers, L.E., et al., "Quasi-phase-matches optical parametric oscillators in bulkperiodically poled LiNbO3," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 12, pp. 2102-2116 (1995).
44. Yoo, S.J.B., et al., "Quasi-pase-matched second-harmonic generation in AlGaAswaveguides with periodic domain inversion achieved by wafer-bonding," Appl.Phys. Lett., vol. 66, pp. 3410-3412 (1995).
45. Eyers, L.A., et al., "All-epitaxial fabricaton of thick, orientation-patterned GaAsfilms for nonlinear optical frequency conversion," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 79, pp.904-906 (2001).
46. Diez, S., et al., "Four-Wave Mixing in Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers forFrequency Conversion and Fast Optical Switching," IEEE J. Selected TopicsQuant. Elec., vol. 3, pp. 1131-1145 (1997).
47. Doran, N.J. and D. Wood, "Nonlinar-optical loop mirror," Opt. Lett., vol. 13, pp.56-58 (1988).
48. Farries, M.C. and D.N. Payne, "Optical fiber switch employing a Sagnacinterferometer," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 55, pp. 25-27 (1989).
49. Blow, K.J., et al., "Two-wavelength operation of the nonlinear fiber loop mirror,"Opt. Lett., vol. 15, pp. 248-250 (1990).
50. Moores, J.D., et al., "Demonstration of optical switching by means of solitarywave collisions in a fiber ring reflector," Opt. Lett., vol. 16, pp. 138-140 (1991).
51. Islam, M.N., et al., "Soliton switching in a fiber nonlinear loop mirror," Opt. Lett.,vol. 14, pp. 811-813 (1989).
52. Segev, M., M. Shih, and G.C. Valley, "Photorefractive screening solitons of highand low intensity," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 13, pp. 706-718 (1996).
53. Shih, M., et al., "Waveguides induced by photorefractive screening solitons," J.Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 14, pp. 3091-3101 (1997).
54. Hasegawa, A. and Y. Kodama, Solitons in Optical Communication (OxfordUniversity Press, Oxford, 1995).
55. Andrade-Lucio, J.A., et al., "Optical switching by coherent collision of spatialsolitons," Elec. Lett., vol. 36, pp. 1403-1405 (2000).
56. Haus, H.A. and W.S. Wong, "Solitons in optical communications," Rev. Mod.Phys., vol. 68, pp. 423-444 (1996).
57. Haus, H.A., "Optical Fiber Solitons, Their Properties and Uses," Proc. IEEE, vol.81, pp. 970-983 (1993).
46
58. Nakazawa, M., K. Suzuki, and H. Kubota, "Single-channel 80 Gbit/s solitontransmission over 10000 km using in-line synchronous modulation," Elec. Lett.,vol. 35, pp. 162-164 (1999).
59. Islam, M.N., C.E. Soccolich, and J.P. Gordon, "Ultrafast digital soliton logicgates," Optical and Quantum Electronics, vol. 24, pp. S1215-S1235 (1992).
60. Islam, M.N., "Billiard-ball soliton interaction gates," Opt. Lett., vol. 16, pp. 1490-1492 (1991).
61. Blow, K.J. and J.K. Lucek, "Optical-intensity dependent switching using soltionself-frequency shift," Elec. Lett., vol. 27, pp. 882-884 (1991).
62. Islam, M.N., C.E. Soccolich, and D.A.B. Miller, "Low-energy ultrafast fibersoliton logic gate," Opt. Lett., vol. 15, pp. 909-911 (1990).
63. Ahn, K.H., et al., "Experimental Demonstration of a Low-Latency Fiber SolitonLogic Gate," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 1768-1775 (1996).
64. Stegeman, G.I. and E.M. Wright, "All-optical waveguide switching," Optical andQuantum Electronics, vol. 22, pp. 95-122 (1990).
65. Jensen, S.M., "The Nonlinear Coherent Coupler," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 18,pp. 1580-1583 (1982).
66. LiKamWa, P., et al., "All Optical Multiple-Quantum-Well Waveguide Switch,"Elec. Lett., vol. 21, pp. 26-28 (1985).
67. Nakatsuhara, K., et al., All-optical switching with separate wavelengths for probeand control in nonlinear directional coupler loaded with Bragg reflector in Lasersand Electro-Optics Society Annual Meeting 2000 (IEEE, 2000).
68. Villeneuve, A., et al., "Ultrafast all-optical switching in semiconductor nonlineardirectional couplers at half the band gap," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 61, pp. 147-149(1992).
69. Friberg, S.R., et al., "Femtosecond switching in a dual-core-fiber nonlinearcoupler," Opt. Lett., vol. 13, pp. 904-906 (1988).
70. Hulin, D., et al., "Ultrafast all-optical gate with subpicosecond ON and OFFresponse time," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 49, pp. 749-751 (1986).
71. Lehmen, A.V., et al., "Optical Stark effect on excitons in GaAs quantum wells,"Opt. Lett., vol. 11, pp. 609-611 (1986).
72. Boyd, R.W. and M.S. III, "Population pulsations and the dynamic Stark effect," J.Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 5, pp. 99-110 (1988).
47
73. Kan'an, A.M., et al., "1.7-ps Consecutive Switching in an Integrated Multiple-Quantum-Well Y-Junction Optical Switch," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 8, pp.1641-1643 (1996).
74. Paye, J. and D. Hulin, "Monochromatic all-optical gate with 1 ps response time,"Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 62, pp. 1326-1329 (1993).
75. Yamanishi, M. and M. Kurosaki, "Ultrafast Optical Nonlinearity by VirtualCharge Polarization in DC-Biased Quantum Well Structures," IEEE J. Quant.Elec., vol. 24, pp. 325-331 (1988).
76. Eiselt, M., "Optical Loop Mirror with Seiconductor Laser Amplifier," Elec. Lett.,vol. 28, pp. 1505-1507 (1992).
77. Sokoloff, J.P., et al., "A Terhertz Optical Asymmetric Demultiplexer (TOAD),"IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 5, pp. 787-790 (1993).
78. Manning, R.J., et al., "Semiconductor laser amplifiers for ultrafast all-opticalsignal processing," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 14, pp. 3204-3216 (1997).
79. Runser, R.J., et al., "Interferometric ultrafast SOA-based optical switches: Fromdevices to applications," Optical and Quantum Electronics, vol. 33, pp. 841-874(2001).
80. Glesk, I., J.P. Sokoloff, and P.R. Prucnal, "Demonstration of all-opticaldemultiplexing of TDM data at 250 Gbit/s," Elec. Lett., vol. 30, pp. 339-341(1994).
81. Manning, R.J., et al., "Enhanced recovery rates in semiconductor laser amplifiersusing optical pumping," Elec. Lett., vol. 30, pp. 787-788 (1994).
82. Kobayashi, S. and T. Kimura, Semiconductor optical amplifiers, in IEEESpectrum, pp. 26-33, (1984).
83. Simon, J.C., "GaInAsP Semiconductor Laser Amplifiers for Single-Mode FiberCommunications," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. LT-5, pp. 1286-1295 (1987).
84. Durhuus, T., et al., "All-Optical Wavelength Conversion by SemiconductorOptical Amplifiers," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 942-954 (1996).
85. Edagawa, N., et al., Novel wavelength converter using an electroabsorptionmodulator: conversion experiments at up to 40 Gbit/s in Optical FiberCommunication 97 (1997).
86. Kan'an, A.M. and P. LiKamWa, "Ultrafast all-optical switching not limited by thecarrier lifetime in an integrated multiple-quantum-well Mach-Zehnderinterferometer," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 14, pp. 3217-3223 (1997).
48
87. Yu, J., et al., "40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion in cascade of SOA and NOLMand demonstration of extinction ratio improvement," Elec. Lett., vol. 36, pp. 963-964 (2000).
88. Leuthold, J., et al., "100 Gbit/s all-optical wavelength conversion with integratedSOA delayed-interference configuration," Elec. Lett., vol. 36, pp. 1129-1130(2000).
89. Takahashi, R., Y. Kawamura, and H. Iwamura, "Ultrafast 1.55 �m all-opticalswitching using low-temperature-grown multiple quantum wells," Appl. Phys.Lett., vol. 68, pp. 153-155 (1996).
90. Kobayashi, H., et al., "1 Tbit/s demultiplexing using low temperature grownInGaAs/InAlAs multiple quantum wells," Elec. Lett., vol. 34, pp. 908-910 (1998).
91. Hirano, A., et al., "10 Gbit/s RZ all-optical discrimination using refined saturableabsorber optical gate," Elec. Lett., vol. 34, pp. 198-199 (1998).
92. Loka, H.S. and P.W.E. Smith, "Ultrafast All-Optical Switching in an AsymmetricFabry-Perot Device Using Low-Temperature-Grown GaAs," Photon. Tech. Lett.,vol. 10, pp. 1733-1735 (1998).
93. Loka, H.S. and P.W.E. Smith, "Ultrafast All-Optical Switching with anSymmetric Faby-Perot Device Using Low-Temperature-Grown GaAs: Materialand Device Issues," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 36, pp. 100-111 (2000).
94. Smith, P.W. and D.A.B. Miller, "Optical Bistability," Laser Focus, vol. 18, pp. 77(1982).
95. Gibbs, H.M., Optical Bistability: Controlling Light with Light (Academic Press,Orlando, 1985).
96. Khurgin, J.B., et al., "Cascaded optical nonlinearities: Microscopic understandingas a collective effect," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 14, pp. 1977-1983 (1997).
97. Khurgin, J., "Coulomb enhancement of ultrafast nonlinearities in quantum-wellstructures," J. Opt. Soc. Am. B, vol. 9, pp. 157-172 (1992).
98. Miller, D.A.B., "Quantum-well self-electro-optic effect devices," Optical andQuantum Electronics, vol. 22, pp. S61-S98 (1990).
99. Weiner, J.S., et al., "Low Voltage Modulator and Self-Biased Self-Electro-OpticEffect Device," Elec. Lett., vol. 23, pp. 75-77 (1987).
100. Lentine, A.L., et al., "A 2 kbit Array of Symmetric Self-Electrooptic EffectDevices," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 2, pp. 51-53 (1990).
101. Goossen, K.W., et al., "GaAs MQW modulators integrated with silicon CMOS,"IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 7, pp. 360-362 (1995).
49
102. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Novel hybrid optically bistable switch: The quantum wellself-electro-optic effect device," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 45, pp. 13-15 (1984).
103. Lentine, A.L. and D.A.B. Miller, "Evolution of the SEED Technology: BistableLogic Gates to Optoelectronic Smart Pixels," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 29, pp.655-669 (1993).
104. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Electroric Field Dependence of Optical Absorption nearthe Bandgap of Quantum Well Structures," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 32, pp. 1043-1060(1985).
105. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "The Quantum Well Self-Electrooptic Effect Device:Optoelectronic Bistablility and Oscillation, and Self-Linearized Modulation,"IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 31, pp. 1462-1475 (1985).
106. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Integrated quantum well self-electro-optic effect device:2x2 array of optically bistable switches," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 49, pp. 821-823(1986).
107. Lentine, A.L., et al., "Symmetric Self-Electrooptic Effect Device: Optical Set-Reset Latch, Differential Logic Gate, and Differential Modulator/Detector," IEEEJ. Quant. Elec., vol. 25, pp. 1928-1936 (1989).
108. Serkland, D.K., et al., Fast-switching symmetric self-electrooptic-effect device at865 nm in CLEO 2000 (Opt. Soc. Am., 2000).
109. Wheatley, P., et al., "Novel Nonresonant Optoelectronic Logic Device," Elec.Lett., vol. 23, pp. 92-93 (1987).
110. Wheatley, P., et al., "Dynamic Response of an Integrated Optoelectronic LogicDevice," Elec. Lett., vol. 23, pp. 1249-1250 (1987).
111. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Field-Effect Transistor Self-Electrooptic Effect Deivce:Integrated Photodiode, Quantum Well Modulator and Transistor," IEEE Phot.Tech. Lett., vol. 1, pp. 62-64 (1989).
112. Miller, D.A.B., Dense Optical Interconnections for Silicon Electronics, in Trendsin Optics: Research, Developments, and Applications, A. Consortini, Editor, pp.207-222 (Academic Press, 1996).
113. Lentine, A.L., et al., "High-Speed Optoelectronic VLSI Switching Chip with>4000 Optical I/O Based on Flip-Chip Bonding of MQW Modulators andDetectors to Silicon CMOS," IEEE J. Selected Topics Quant. Elec., vol. 2, pp. 77-84 (1996).
114. Miller, D.A.B., Device requirements for digital optical processing, in DigitalOptical Computing, R.A. Athale, Editor, pp. 68-76 (1990).
50
115. Bar-Joseph, I., et al., "Self-electro-optic effect device and modulation convertorwith InGaAs/InP multiple quantum wells," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 52, pp. 51-53(1988).
116. Schmitt-Rink, S., D.S. Chemla, and D.A.B. Miller, "Linear and nonlinear opticalproperties of semiconductor quantum wells," Advances in Physics, vol. 38, pp. 89-188 (1989).
51
Chapter III: OCOG Device Concept
In this chapter, we introduce the basic operating principles of the three
generations of devices studied. Detailed analysis and results will follow in subsequent
chapters.
3.1 FIRST GENERATION OCOG-13.1.1 Principles of OCOG-1 operation
The first generation optically-controlled optical gate produced a 50 ps window
that changed the absolute reflectivity of the signal pulse from approximately 30% to 60%,
a 2:1 contrast ratio, with a switching energy of 5 fJ/�m2. It was a simple reverse-biased
multiple quantum well p-i(MQW)-n diode (Fig. 3.1) with a fixed external voltage whose
reflectivity was able to be temporarily changed by a control pulse of light, as the
schematic in Fig. 3.2 shows. The device was initially made relatively opaque by setting
the bias voltage so that the heavy-hole exciton absorption peak was at the same
wavelength as the control pulse. The control light was thus absorbed in the MQW
intrinsic region, creating electrons and holes. These photogenerated carriers escaped
from the quantum wells and were then pulled toward the n and p regions, respectively.
As they separated, these carriers screened the applied electric field across the intrinsic
region of the device. As a result, the optical absorption of the quantum wells was
blue-shifted due to the quantum-confined Stark effect (QCSE), as suggested by Fig.
3.3.[1] While this screening lasted, the effective absorption of the device was reduced,
allowing a second, signal pulse to be strongly transmitted (or in the presence of a buried
mirror, as with our device, strongly reflected).
52
V
p
n
_
+
i (MQWs)
Figure 3.1: Schematic picture of OCOG-1, a reverse biased p-i(MQW)-n diode. Optical control and signalpulses are incident from the top of the device (surface-normal).
1st light pulse strongly absorbed in intrinsic region
As electrons and holes separate, absorption changes with effective voltage
2nd light pulse not strongly absorbed Absorption gate closes asvoltage diffuses away
V
V
V
V
p
n
_
+
i
1) t~0 2) t~10 ps
3) t~20 ps 4) t~50 ps
+ +
+
_
_ _
p
p p
n
n n
i
ii
(mirror)
Figure 3.2: Schematic illustration of OCOG-1 device behavior over time with incident pump (control) andprobe (signal) pulses. The control pulse is absorbed in the reverse-biased device, creating electrons andholes that subsequently moved to shield the voltage locally. Consequently, the absorption of the device isreduced such that the signal pulse can be strongly reflected. As the shielding voltage dissipates, the devicereturns to its opaque state. In this device, the wavelengths of the control and signal pulses may be at thesame.
53
The duration of the strongly reflecting “ON” state of the device lasted while the
bias voltage remained screened. Normally, a principle objection to such a device would
be that, although the gating could potentially be turned on rapidly, the turn-off time
would be long, perhaps corresponding to the external resistive-capacitive (RC) time
constant of the entire device of, say, several nanoseconds. However, another process,
diffusive conduction, was exploited to relax the voltage in a controllable manner on a
significantly shorter time scale.[2]
6V
10V
0V
Figure 3.3: Description of the Quantum Confined Stark Effect (QCSE). (Left) From [3]. The electron andhole wavefunctions and energies in the conduction and valence bands, respectively, for a quantum wellwithout an electric field (left side) and with an electric field (right side). In the presence of an electric fieldthe energy spacing between the ground electron and hole states shrinks, reducing the bandgap. Thequantum well barriers provide confinement of the wavefunctions under bias, resulting in a strong excitonicabsorption peak – though this weakens as the bias increases. (Right) An example of the absorption profilenear the bandgap in GaAs MQWs for a variety of biases. As the bias increases, the absorption peaksignificantly red-shifts. This functionality is used in OCOG devices to make their absorption sensitive tothe electric field.
54
x
y
V
Figure. 3.4. Conceptual mesh of resistors (the doped n and p layers) and capacitors (the intrinsic region)for analysis of the diffusive conduction. For simplicity, the resistance is shown only in the p layer.
The p and n regions of a diode can be considered as the resistive planes of a plate
capacitor (the intrinsic region) and can be modeled as a mesh of resistors with
capacitance between the top and bottom layers, as illustrated in Fig. 3.4. In such a mesh,
if the voltage is changed locally by injecting charge into some of the capacitors (e.g., via
photogeneration, see Fig. 3.5), the voltage can relax through the local electrical
conduction in the resistors. Analysis of this type of structure reveals that the voltage
obeys the following relationship:
� �� �2,
,xy
dV x yD V x y
dt� � (3.1)
which has the form of a diffusion equation. V is the voltage across the intrinsic layer at a
lateral position (x.y). It is important to understand that this does not represent the
diffusion of the generated carriers as in a bulk semiconductor; rather, it is a dissipative
electrical wave propagation that can actually travel much faster than the physical
movement of individual carriers. The effective diffusion constant, D, is given by
1
sq A
DR C
� (3.2)
where Rsq is the sum of the resistances per square of the top and bottom conducting layers
and CA is the capacitance per unit area. Diffusive conduction is described in detail in
Chapter 4.
55
pin
Control pulse
yx
Voltage
Figure 3.5: Conceptual illustrations of (left) the resistance per square and capacitance per unit area of ap-i-n diode with an incident control pulse with a relative small spot size and (right) the resulting voltagedue to the separation of the photogenerated carriers (left). Note that the voltage change induced by carriermovement inside the diode is always a reduction of the local voltage, though it is more convenient to treatthis change as a positive number, and hence as a “peak” that changes in time.
The optical beam used has a Gaussian lateral intensity profile that results in an
injected charge (and hence voltage) distribution that was initially Gaussian as well.
Given this initial condition, the solution to the diffusion equation has a simple analytic
expression for the local voltage change as a function of time t and radius r from the
center of the beam,
� �� ��
��
����
�
��
�
��
�
tDr
tVtrV M 4
exp,2
(3.3)
where
Dwo
8
2
�� (3.4)
and
Ao
totM Cw
QV 2
2�
� (3.5)
Here Qtot is the total charge created (on each capacitor plate) by the absorbed photons and
w0 is the 1/e2 intensity radius of the Gaussian beam.
56
10 5 0 5 100
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
Radial Distance, r
Volta
ge C
hang
e (A
rb. U
nits
) t=0
1
49
Figure 3.6: Illustration of relaxation of the initial Gaussian voltage distribution in diffusive electricalconduction from an initial Gaussian voltage distribution on the conducting capacitor plates at time t = 0.Curves are shown for times t = 0, 1, 4, and 9 units. Time is in units of the characteristic time,�. Distance isin units of the initial Gaussian spot radius, wo.
The absorption of photons in the quantum well layers and the subsequent
separation of the photogenerated electrons and holes due to the electric field leads to a
voltage reduction, or screening, in the p and n regions that laterally is essentially
Gaussian in shape. In time, the Gaussian distribution expands, reducing the local
magnitude of the voltage change as it spreads and returning the device to nearly its
original condition. Fig. 3.6 illustrates a Gaussian voltage change as a function of time
due to diffusive conduction. The generated charge does eventually move through the
external circuit, but the local voltage can be relaxed on a time scale much faster than this
external charge movement, and so it is not limited by the external circuitry’s relatively
long RC time constant. The characteristic time for this local voltage recovery, �, is
strongly dependent on controllable parameters: the doping levels of the p and n layers and
the spot size, w0. Hence, in this type of device, the turn-on time is controlled by the
emission and separation of charges from quantum wells, and the turn-off time is governed
by the diffusive electrical conduction. Both processes can operate in the picosecond
regime, allowing an optoelectronic gate to function on a short time scale.
Actually, the external circuitry and overall device RC response cannot be
dismissed quite so easily. This behavior effectively acts as a “global” device repetition
57
rate that is convolved with the “local” optical modulation recovery rate just described.
Through diffusive conduction, the localized photogenerated carrier density is quickly
smoothed out across the entire device. This process results in rapid local recovery but
creates a finite, albeit much smaller, global screening voltage with a relaxation rate
determined by the overall RC time constant. With periodic optical pulses consistently
generating carriers, a steady state global screening voltage may be reached. As the
repetition rate of the optical pulses increases, so does the effective bias point. This shift –
roughly proportional to the ratio of the RC value of the device to the time period between
pulses – may be easily compensated for by adjusting the original bias voltage and does
not of itself limit the repetition rate. Other mechanisms, such as restrictions on power
dissipation, might set the practical limit on the data rates the overall device can handle.
3.1.2 Advantages and disadvantages of OCOG-1An important feature of OCOG-1 is that it can be very sensitive (low required
switching power) compared to other optically-controlled switches that are based on
processes such as absorption saturation. The reason for this sensitivity is that the charge
generated in each well eventually contributes to screening in all the wells once the
charges have been transported to the doped layers (see Fig. 3.7). To take the simplest
case, if the carriers leave all the wells and gather at the electrodes, then, for N wells
altogether in the structure, the field screening will be correspondingly N times as large
compared to the case of in-well screening with the same number of total carriers.i
Suppose, for example, there are 50 quantum wells in the structure. The total number of
carriers per unit area required for a 5 x 104 V/cm field change (which is large enough to
cause significant electroabsorption change of transmission) is about 3 x 1011 cm-2. To
achieve this, an average of only about 1/50th of that carrier density is required to be
initially generated in each well, i.e., ~ 6 x 109 cm-2. That corresponds to an incident
optical energy of just ~2 fJ/�m2 instead of the greater than 100 fJ/�m2 needed for in-well
screening or a nonlinear optical process such as excitonic saturation. Hence, compared to
excitonic absorption saturation or in-well screening, we have a nonlinear effect that is at
58
least 50 times stronger in terms of the energy required to effect switching. The main cost
for this benefit of low-power operation is a longer turn-on time.
in p
i
electrons
holes
n p
Quantum Wells
Figure 3.7: Illustration of the different electric field magnitudes -- the thickness of the horizontal blackarrows -- across the intrinsic region of a p-i(MQW)-n diode depending on if (top) the electrons and holesstay in the quantum wells (in-well screening), or (bottom) there are four quantum wells and the electronsand holes fully separate. If there were 100 quantum wells and the carriers fully separate, the electric fieldwould be an 25 times larger than the illustrated 4 quantum well case. The increase in the potential electricfield due to carrier separation instead of in-well screening is clear.
There is a fundamental trade-off between the magnitude of the signal change due
to switching and its initial speed. A thicker MQW region enables a larger number of total
carriers to be absorbed, providing a potentially larger electric field and, hence, absorption
change. The average transport time for the photogenerated carriers increases at the same
time, however, and results in a longer turn-on period. In seeking to optimize these
effects, the reduction in CA due to the wider intrinsic region, and thus smaller �, must also
be taken into account.
It is worth noting that OCOG-1 can operate either when both control and signal
pulses have the same wavelength near the heavy-hole exciton resonance or when the
i Note that the field between two sheets of charge depends only on the total charge density in the sheets, noton the separation distance between the sheets (field dependence near spot-center is similar to a parallelplate capacitor).
59
control pulse is at a shorter wavelength. That pulse is still strongly absorbed in the MQW
region, allowing the capability for limited wavelength conversion.
Unlike most optically-controlled switches, OCOG devices may also be made in
2-D arrays due to their surface-normal configuration. Moreover, their optoelectronic
nature allows straight-forward integration with electronic circuitry, such as
complementary metal-oxide-semiconductors (CMOS), via well-established techniques
such as flip-chip bonding.[4] This surface-normal configuration limits the active region
where the absorption occurs to merely the thickness of the intrinsic region (typically
~1 �m thick). Consequently, the contrast-ratio (CR) of these types of devices is small,
e.g. 3 dB, compared to, say, waveguide devices which may have a CR of 10-20 dB. The
change in actual power, fortunately, is large, approximately 30%, so that a pair of
OCOGs could be effectively used in a differential pair configuration to significantly
improve the effective CR. Data from the different generations of OCOG devices is
presented in Chapter 6.
3.1.3 Other uses of OCOG-1If the recovery of the gate is fast, an OCOG can be used as a time-sensitive gate;
the second pulse is strongly transmitted only if it arrives within a short time window after
the first pulse. This type of switch may be useful for applications such as time division
demultiplexing when an interface is needed between the extremely fast bit rates possible
in optical fiber and the relatively slow speed of CMOS processing.
The device can also operate as a logic AND gate; only if both pulses arrive (in the
correct timing sequence) is the second pulse transmitted. The amount of photocurrent
generated by the absorption of the second pulse will be sensitive to the time of arrival of
the second pulse, so the device can operate as a gated photodetector. The device should
also permit a weak first pulse to gate a stronger second pulse, so the device may be able
to show signal gain. This gain is possible because a pulse, if its pulse width is shorter
than the carrier escape and transport time, has relatively little effect on itself; its electrical
effects grow after it has been absorbed.
60
3.2 SECOND GENERATION OCOG-23.2.1 Principles of OCOG-2 operation
The OCOG-2 was similar to OCOG-1 in that a control pulse of light was used to
temporarily change the absorption in a MQW diode structure, switching the transmission
of a second light pulse. The basic operating mechanisms were the same but used in a
slightly different manner in order to improve the speed and flexibility of the device.
OCOG-1 devices were limited by the escape time of the photogenerated carriers,
principally holes, from the quantum wells as well as by the drift time required to reach
the doped layers. Moreover, there was a trade-off in the design of the MQW region
between fast escape and strong absorption sensitivity to electric fields. To overcome
these limitations, the control and modulator functions were separated. OCOG-2 was a
dual diode-like structure, n-i-p-i(MQW)-n, stacked on top of a distributed Bragg reflector
(DBR) mirror, shown schematically in Fig. 3.8. The bottom (modulator) diode, which
contained multiple quantum wells in its intrinsic region, had its absorption switched when
an incident control pulse was absorbed in the top (control) diode. The results were
switching speeds with less than 10 ps FWHM switching times, significantly faster than
the OCOG-1 device.
By separating the control and modulation functions in OCOG-2s, it was possible
to optimize each section separately. A bulk intrinsic section in the top diode avoided
delay due to carrier escape from the QWs (since there were no QWs in the top diode!)
and also allowed the use of a potentially thinner intrinsic region and thus provide shorter
transit times. At the same time, the bottom MQW region could be thicker and the wells
optimized for absorption shift; both could improve the switching behavior without the
need to be overly concerned with sweep-out times.
61
_Va
Vb
+
+nip
i (MQWs)
n
Control Diode
Modulator Diode
Figure 3.8: Device schematic of OCOG-2 -- a double diode, n-i-p-i(MQW)-n structure with separate biascontrols for each layer.
Gate dynamics are illustrated in Fig. 3.9. The control diode was designed to be
transparent to the signal (probe) pulse but opaque to a control (pump) pulse at a shorter
wavelength. The modulator diode was reverse biased so that the MQWs were initially
substantially transparent to the signal as compared to when the gate was “on”; the system
was in its highly reflective state for the signal. Upon absorption of the control pulse in
the reverse-biased top diode, the photogenerated carriers locally vertically separated,
locally screening the bias in the vicinity of the control pulse spot. As a consequence of
the dual-diode structure, the reverse bias voltage on the bottom diode was locally
increased, raising the absorption of the MQWs and hence decreasing the reflectivity of
the device through the QCSE. The turn-on time of the device was determined by the
voltage build-up time due to carrier transport in the bulk intrinsic region of the top diode.
The turn-off time of the device was controlled by the local electrical relaxation of the
voltage across the diodes through diffusive conduction (described in detail in Chapter 4).
OCOG-2’s repetition rate was constrained, as with OCOG-1, by this fast on-off cycle
rather than the external RC time constants.
62
(1) t=0 (2) t=0-4ps
(3) t~4ps (4) t=4-20ps
The control pulse is absorbed in the top diode
The voltage build-up decays away and the device returns to its opaque state: OFF
Top Diode
Bottom Diode
Va
Vb
Control
Top Diode
Bottom Diode
Va
Vb
Signal
Top Diode
Bottom Diode
Va
Vb
Signal
Top Diode
Bottom Diode
Va
Vb
Voltage build-up changes absorption levelin bottom diode: ON
+ + + - - -_
+
+
_
+
+
_
+
+
_
+
+
Photogenerated carriers separate, shielding the voltage across the top diode
Figure 3.9: Schematic of the optically controlled optical gate (OCOG-2) device operation with picosecondpulses.
The dual diode structure can be modeled as a series of dielectric layers (the intrinsic
regions), each sandwiched between conducting layers (p and n regions). A key aspect of
OCOG-2s was that the top-most and bottom-most layers of the entire device were highly
conductive. Consequently, the voltage between these two layers was held effectively
constant. Therefore, any local voltage reduction (increase) in the top diode leads to a
corresponding local voltage increase (decrease) in the bottom diode so that the overall
voltage remains steady (Fig. 3.10).ii Because a voltage change could be induced in the
bottom diode due to changes in the top diode, the separation of the control and modulator
functions was possible in this device. Interestingly, for OCOG-2 devices, if the induced
voltage change is sufficiently large, the bottom p-i(MQW)-n diode may be temporarily
forward biased, opening an entirely new class of devices based on
optoelectronically-controlled optical gain.
ii Actually, the voltage was not held perfectly constant; the response time of the device was finite, albeitvery fast (on the order of 1 ps). Induced voltage was properly modeled by solving the coupled voltageequations of the device as described in Chapter IV.
63
Voltage
Time�VBOTTOM
�VTOP
Figure 3.10: Illustration of induced voltage in a dual-layer OCOG device. The overall voltage is heldconstant across the entire device due to highly conducting top-most and bottom-most layers. Consequently,a change in voltage in the top part of the structure (e.g., across the top intrinsic region) must becompensated for by an opposite change in voltage across the bottom part of the structure (e.g., the MQWintrinsic layer) so that the overall change in voltage is zero.
3.2.2 OCOG-2 advantages and disadvantagesAs indicated above, the primary advantage of the dual diode structure was that its
turn-on speed could be decoupled from QW escape times, a significant improvement over
OCOG-1. As a gated photodetector, the dual diodes make separating the control and
signal pulse photocurrents an inherent property of the device. To function properly, it
was important that the control pulse be fully absorbed in the top diode since leakage into
the bottom diode could have led to faulty signaling as well as excess carriers in the MQW
region. Unlike the OCOG-1, the wavelengths of the control and signal pulse in OCOG-2
must, therefore, be different.
3.3 THIRD GENERATION OCOG-3The third-generation optically-controlled optical gates were variations on the
basic configuration of OCOG-2. The control and MQW regions were separate, but the
number of layers and the conductivities of the p and n regions differed as the device was
altered to make it faster and more efficient. A p-i-n-p-i(MQW)-n structure was designed
as OCOG-3. Large-signal response times of 20 ps were demonstrated, again with about a
30% absolute reflectivity change; 12 ps FW10%M small-signal gating was also shown at
64
50 GHz burst-logic rates, about three times faster again than OCOG-2. These results are
presented in detail in Chapter 6.
As the top intrinsic region was screened due to the photogenerated carriers of the
control pulse, it induced the opposite change in voltage in the MQWs. Because the p and
n regions are reversed in this section compared to OCOG-2, the induced voltage added a
negative bias across the bottom intrinsic layer, red-shifting the exciton peak, increasing
the absorption. OCOG-3, consequently, was inverting.
Control Diode
Modulator Diode
Vt
+
Vb
+
_
_
ni
pin
p
Figure 3.11: Schematic of the p-i-n-p-i(MQW)-n structure of OCOG-3.
The top intrinsic layer was made thinner to increase the carrier sweep-out rate,
reducing the turn-on time. More critically, OCOG-3 was, in fact, a device with three
depletion regions; the depletion region between the middle n and p layers played a key
role in its operation. Adding this additional intervening layer in the device enabled a
faster turn-off time due to diffusive conduction recovery. The diffusive conduction
behavior due to the coupled layers of the dual diode’s layers changes the voltage
recovery’s functional dependence on time, resulting in faster turn-off times. (See details
in Chapter IV.) Although the gating time of the bottom (MQW) layer can shrink
significantly, the overall repetition rate of the device, however, is affected to a lesser
degree.
65
REFERENCES
1. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Electronic Field Dependence of Optical Absorption nearthe Bandgap of Quantum Well Structures," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 32, pp. 1043-1060(1985).
2. Livescu, G., et al., "High-speed absorption recovery in quantum well diodes bydiffusive electrical conduction," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 54, pp. 748-750 (1989).
3. Miller, D.A.B., D.S. Chemla, and S. Schmitt-Rink, "Relation betweenelectroabsorption in bulk semiconductors and in quantum wells: The quantum-confined Franz-Keldysh effect," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 33, pp. 6976-6982 (1986).
4. Goossen, K.W., et al., "GaAs MQW modulators integrated with silicon CMOS,"IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 7, pp. 360-362 (1995).
66
Chapter IV: Theory of Optically Controlled
Optical Gates
Diffusive conduction, as stated in previous chapters, was responsible for relaxing
the voltage changes due to photogenerated carrier separation in OCOGs. This chapter
provides a more in-depth discussion of diffusive conduction and related phenomena as
well as the means to accurately model OCOG device mechanisms.
4.1 THEORY OF DIFFUSIVE CONDUCTION
The response of semiconductor devices to photogenerated carriers has been a critical area
of research over the past several decades due to the wide variety of uses for
light-sensitive devices, such as photodetectors, optical switches, and lasers. Carrier
dynamics due to diffusion often play an important role in the behavior of these types of
devices and have been extensively investigated. For example, it has been shown that in
bulk material, ambipolar diffusion is the primary diffusion mechanism for
photogenerated carriers.[1-6] In the mid-to-late 1980s it was discovered, however, that
diffusion in semiconductor p-i-n diode and n-i-p-i structures could exhibit a response
several orders of magnitude faster than ambipolar diffusion. Two mechanisms were
separately proposed: diffusive conduction and giant ambipolar diffusion.[7, 8] Since that
time, work based on these phenomena has progressed.[9-14]
Unlike in a bulk semiconductor material, in reverse-biased diodes, n-i-p-i’s, and
biased n-i-n or p-i-p devices electrons and holes separate, building up a carrier
density-dependent screening potential between them. As will be shown, it is this
difference which accounts for the dramatically enhanced diffusion in diodes versus bulk
material.
4.1.1 Qualitative descriptions of enhanced diffusionEnhanced diffusion may be described from two different perspectives:
microscopic, focusing on charge motion, or macroscopic, observing the voltage dynamics
67
of the system. Diffusion in semiconductors is often approached microscopically. In bulk
semiconductor material in the absence of electric fields, photogenerated carrier dynamics
are well described by regular ambipolar diffusion: when a neutral distribution of excess
carriers is created in bulk semiconductor material, e.g., via photogeneration, the electrons
and holes predominantly move together. Local charge neutrality is approximately
maintained, in spite of the different mobilities of the charge carriers, because the
Coulomb attraction between an electron and hole is much stronger than the dispersive
effects of diffusion alone. As a result, electrons and holes diffuse together with a single
diffusion coefficient that equals a weighted average of the (isolated) electron and hole
diffusion coefficients.
The material composition of p-i-n, n-i-p-i, and other similar semiconductor
structures is direction dependent; carrier motion in the direction perpendicular to the
layers, hereafter referred to as either z or “vertical”, may be quite different from that of
motion parallel to the planes, here defined as “lateral” or �. In these types of devices,
photogenerated electrons and holes in the intrinsic region separate in the vertical direction
due to the built-in and/or applied voltage across the layers of the device. Note that this
chapter only addresses lateral carrier dynamics, not vertical. Vertical carrier transport has
been a subject of extensive research; see, for example, Ref [15-19] and is included in the
simulations (Chapter 7). Understanding the effects that vertical charge separation has on
lateral carrier movement can be subtle. Briefly, the vertical separation of a localized
group of photogenerated carriers creates a lateral voltage gradient that pushes both
electrons and holes away much faster than ambipolar diffusion alone does.[20]
How and why does this happen? A schematic view of a p-i-n device is presented
in Fig. 4.1 (Top). The built-in/bias voltage across the intrinsic region is linearly related to
�np, the separation between the electron, �n, and hole, �p, quasi-Fermi levels. After a
pulse of light is absorbed, the photogenerated carriers vertically separate and the electric
field in the intrinsic region is screened, although only in the vicinity of the incident pulse
light beam. The results are illustrated in Fig. 4.1 (Middle). As more carriers are injected,
separate, and screen the field, the built-in and/or reverse bias voltage decreases in the
vicinity of the absorbed light beam pulse, and �np changes. The magnitude of this shift
in the quasi-Fermi levels is strongly dependent on the magnitude of the photogenerated
68
charge that has separated. This dependence is linear, at least for small voltage changes
and/or large reverse biases, because it results primarily from the reduction in voltage
from the vertical charge separation. An equivalent statement is that the derivative of �np
with respect to the density of the separated charge density is large or “giant”. This shift is
much larger than the typically logarithmic shift of quasi-Fermi levels found in a bulk
semiconductor that results from the shift of quasi-Fermi levels solely due to the statistical
mechanics of the change in carrier density. It is this fundamental difference – due to
charge separation - that is responsible for enhanced diffusion.
pin
bandgap
incident light pulse beam
separatedphotogeneratedcarriers
built-in/biasvoltage
z
ip n
valence band
quasi-Fermi level:hole and electron
conduction band
z
ip n
z
��
�
screenedvoltage
(“lateral” direction)
�p(��
�n(��
�p(���n(��
Voltage shielding
�
electron and holequasi-Fermi leveldifference, �np(�)
�n(��
�p(��
radial cross-sectionof incident lightpulse intensity
Figure 4.1: Schematic diagrams showing how an incident light pulse may create effective lateral electricfields in a reverse biased p-i-n structure. (TOP) A light pulse incident from the top on a p-i-n device isabsorbed in the intrinsic region, creating electrons (black circles) and holes (white circles) that quicklyvertically separate along z due to the built-in and/or reverse applied bias. (MIDDLE, LEFT) Where noincident light shines, the difference between the electron and hole quasi-Fermi levels, �np, is determined bythe built-in/reverse bias voltage. (MIDDLE, RIGHT) On the other hand, where the incident light isabsorbed, the vertically separated carriers shield the voltage. As a result, �np changes significantly because
69
it is an approximately linear – not logarithmic -- function of the separated photogenerated carrier density.(BOTTOM) Because of the vertical separation of the photogenerated carriers, �np has a lateral dependencethat mimics the lateral intensity variation of the incident light pulse. The resulting lateral gradients of boththe electron, �n, and hole, �p, quasi-Fermi levels produce electric fields in the n and p layers. These fieldshelp ‘push’ both electrons (in the n layer) and holes (in the p layer) laterally away and are what makesenhanced diffusion possible. The magnitude of these fields is proportional to the “giant” derivative of �npwith respect to the separated carrier density. Note also that these effective fields can act on the entirecarrier densities in the n and p regions, not merely the separated photogenerated carriers, further increasingthe effective diffusion.
Continuing with a microscopic perspective, if a pulse of light with a lateral
spatially varied profile, e.g., Gaussian, is absorbed in the intrinsic region, and the
photogenerated electrons and holes quickly separate vertically, �n and �p are forced
initially to have corresponding, though opposite, “lateral” Gaussian spatial dependence,
and consequently so does �np. Fig. 4.1 (Bottom) illustrates this situation. A gradient of a
quasi-Fermi level defines an effective electric field along that gradient (e.g. a gradient in
�n creates a field in the n layer). The lateral spatial variation of the input pulse – when
combined with vertical charge separation – thus creates a lateral electric field in both the
n and p layers. These fields help the carriers in both doped regions to disperse laterally.
The relatively large magnitudes of these extra fields are what account for the enhanced
diffusion effects of giant ambipolar diffusion.
Arguably, this process is not a diffusion process in the conventional sense. The
motion of the carriers can be viewed as a consequence of the electric fields,
corresponding to normal resistive transport. Note, too, that all of the carriers in the n and
p regions move in response to the lateral fields, not merely the additional photocarriers.
The mathematical equation describing the resulting movement of the carrier density of
the voltage pulse does have the form of a diffusion equation. The diffusion constant of
this equation, though, depends on the conductivity of the layers and the gradient of �np
with respect to separated charges – the capacitance between the doped layers. The
appearance of capacitance in the equations further clarifies that we are dealing with a
phenomenon different from conventional diffusion, in which capacitance would certainly
not appear. In this view of the process, it is known as diffusive conduction.[8]
From a macroscopic perspective, diffusive conduction is essentially an extension
of the voltage dynamics of a one-dimensional dissipative transmission line. A voltage
pulse in a transmission line can travel at a speed much faster than that of the individual
70
electrons as is well known in conventional inductive-capactive transmission lines (e.g., a
coaxial cable carrying signals at speeds near the velocity of light). The structures of
interest here are dissipative transmission lines, in which the series resistive impedance of
the p and n layers dominates over the inductive impedance leading to dissipative wave
propagation, but it is still true that the dissipative wave can move faster than the
individual electrons and holes. This is possible in part because the particles in the
medium exert strong forces on one another and because the medium of particles extends
throughout the length of the line. A p-i-n structure can be viewed as a two-dimensional
(“lateral”) version of a dissipative line, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2. The doped p and n
regions each have a resistance per square and there is also a capacitance per unit area
between them across the intrinsic region. When a spatially localized pulse of light is
absorbed (e.g., a light beam with a small spot size is absorbed in the center of a mesa
structure), the photogenerated electrons and holes in the intrinsic region will separate,
shielding the voltage. This results in a spatially localized voltage pulse. The behavior of
the pulse in this dissipative structure may be modeled by a diffusion equation. The result
is voltage diffusion that dissipates the voltage build-up across the entire device. As in a
dissipative transmission line, this response is not limited by individual carrier motion.
Instead, this diffusion depends only on the capacitance per unit area, the spot size, and the
resistance per square and, consequently, may be very fast.
pin
Figure 4.2: Schematic p-i-n structure showing distributed resistance and capacitance (for ease of viewing,resistance in the n layer has not been drawn). This type of structure is the 2D analog of a 1D dissipativetransmission line.
71
4.1.2 General modeling approachesWith an understanding of the qualitative behavior of enhanced diffusion, a
compelling question becomes: can this behavior be modeled from first principles? The
general response of p-i-n diodes and related structures to photogenerated carriers can be
determined from three relationships: (1) the forces present, including those due to the
photogenerated carriers; (2) the motion of all the carriers due to the forces present; and
(3) overall charge neutrality (an equal number of electrons and holes are created by
photogeneration). Combining the above relationships along with the initial and boundary
conditions allows a self-consistent description of the carrier dynamics to be found. Some
of the issues involving this process are discussed next.
The primary forces involved in semiconductor carrier dynamics are the Coulomb
attraction and/or repulsion due to the electric fields of space charges. These can be well
modeled by using, for example, Poisson’s equation.
Determining what should be the degree of accuracy of the equations governing
carrier motion is also an essential task in order to solve for the system dynamics. One of
the most fundamental approaches that may be considered is the use of the Boltzmann
Transport Equation (BTE) to express charge motion via the evolution of a charge
distribution function, ( , , )f tp r :[21]
coll
f f f ft t t t
� � � � � �� � �
� � � � � �
p rp r
(4.1)
where the last term is the change in f due to collisions and p and r are the momentum and
position vectors, respectively. Only two assumptions need to be made: that carriers may
be treated semi-classically (i.e., they have a well-defined position and momentum), and
that there is a sufficient number of carriers to meaningfully use a distribution function.
These are reasonable assumptions for many devices.[22] Unfortunately, making practical
use of this equation and solving for the unknown distribution function is difficult.
The BTE may be simplified, however, into a variety of more tractable expressions
by making appropriate simplifying assumptions.[22] One of the more dramatic
simplifications results in a drift-diffusion equation:
n n nq n qD n�� �j E ∇ (4.2)
72
which expresses the current density of electrons, n, (or holes, p) as a function of ensemble
values (mobility, �n, and diffusion coefficient, Dn, each of which is dependent on the
distribution function, electric field, and temperature) combined with the electric field, E,
and the gradient of the charge density. q is the unit of charge. This equation is the basis
for describing carrier transport that will be used in this dissertation
In writing the drift-diffusion equation, several assumptions have been made:
magnetic fields have been assumed negligible; current due to carrier temperature
gradients (the thermoelectric effect) is small;i finally, mobility and diffusion coefficients
are not dependent on the detailed structure of the device (spatial variations are large
compared to scattering lengths). These last two assumptions are valid if the electric
fields are small or, if large, uniform. The enhanced diffuison transport discussed in this
paper only involves carrier transport of carriers in the lateral, doped planes. Thus, even
though the vertical dimensions of some layers may be small, since the transport is not in
that direction such variation is not critical. There are electric fields generated in the
lateral direction, as will be described below that play an important role in these transport
mechanisms. However, for spot sizes with radii of a few microns or larger, the variation
in electric field does occur over a distance large compared to the scattering length. As a
consequence, the validity of the assumptions remains uncompromised.
In order to use the drift-diffusion equation, the mobility and diffusion coefficient
must also be known a priori.ii Using these ensemble quantities implicitly removes
information regarding the statistical variances of these quantities. This is a safe
i Even if the theroelectric effect was not ignored, the magnitude of the resulting diffusion is within an orderof magnitude of the low-field regular carrier diffusion values and often significantly smaller.i As will beshown, the enhanced diffusion coefficients are two to three orders of magnitude larger, and thus ignoringthe temperature gradient seems reasonable. The actual diffusion coefficient will be slightly larger thanwhat is predicted.
ii The generalized Einstein relations provide the relationship[6]� �
� �
00
1/ 2
nnn
B n
eDk T
��
��
�
�
where � r is the Fermi-Dirac integral of order r, ( ) /n n c B nE k T� �� � is the reduced chemical potential inwhich n� as the quasi-Fermi level, and D0
n is the Maxwell-Boltzmann diffusion coefficient. Here ndenotes electrons. A similar expression may be written for holes.
73
simplification if device behavior is not sensitive to such statistical fluctuations.iii These
quantities are also determined by using an expected value for (momentum) scattering
rate. Hence, only dynamics that occur on a time scale that is large compared to the
inverse of this scattering rate (typically on the order of a picosecond at room temperature)
are well defined.[22] It is worth noting that subsequent behavior based on these
assumptions describes the behavior of the ensemble of particles, not of individual
particles themselves.
Having discussed how to describe carrier motion, next we look more carefully at
the assumption of charge neutrality. Overall charge neutrality arises because
photogenerated carriers are always produced in electron and hole pairs. In bulk
semiconductors, as previously mentioned, local charge neutrality is also maintained in
the absence of external fields even if electrons and holes have different mobilities. The
Coulomb attraction between the carriers is significantly stronger than other prevailing
forces (e.g., such as diffusion, which could separate electrons and holes) and acts to keep
electrons and holes close together on the time-scales of interest. Local charge neutrality
is a key assumption of ambipolar diffusion and accounts for electrons and holes diffusing
together in spite of differing mobilities.[5, 23] In p-i-n’s and n-i-p-i’s, however, there are
built-in and/or applied fields along the z direction that separate the charge species.
Clearly, local charge neutrality no longer applies since the electrons and holes are
separated, typically on the order of one micron or less in many devices. However, the
separation is small enough (i.e. the Coulomb attraction is still sufficiently large) that an
effective local charge neutrality does continue to hold in the lateral directions. (Note: in
studying enhanced diffusion, we assume that no external fields are present in the lateral
directions.)
Even with a simplified expression for carrier transport, Eq. (4.2), and the
assumption of local charge neutrality in the lateral directions, solving for the carrier
dynamics is not easy. Each of the two approaches described below make additional
assumptions to make the math tractable and provide an analytic solution. Diffusive
conduction drops the explicit diffusion term of the transport equation. Giant ambipolar
iii Even at low energies, tens of thousands to hundreds of millions of electrons and holes may bephotogenerated in the intrinsic region. Therefore, if the device response is not sensitive to individualelectrons or holes, ignoring statistical fluctuations is often reasonable.
74
diffusion, on the other hand, simplifies the carrier density description by assuming a
Maxwell-Boltzmann (MB) distribution function in the doped regions.
4.1.3 Giant ambipolar diffusionModeling the effects of charge separation using the drift-diffusion equation is
clearly presented in the paper of Dohler and Gulden, et. al.[24] In the following
equations, subscripts n and p refer to electrons and holes, respectively; j is current
density, �� is mobility, n and p are the carrier densities, � is the quasi-Fermi level, and
( , , )r z � ��
� . Please note that in Sections 4.1.3 and 4.1.4 we temporarily reassign the
polar coordinate variable r to � in order to distinguish it from the general vector r� . A
Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution is assumed and, therefore, the Einstein relations relate
diffusion and mobility through a simple expression:
, pnn p
qDqDkT kT
� �� � (4.3)
where Dn and Dp are the MB electron and hole diffusion constants. Consequently,
current density may be expressed as a function of the quasi-Fermi level gradient:
� �n n nj n r� ��
�
�
� �p p pj p r� ��
�
� (4.4)
If the electron and hole current densities could be expressed in terms of gradients of n and
p, respectively, we could write the relationships as diffusion equations:
n ndnj qD ndt �
� � ��
p pdpj qD pdt �
�
� � � �� (4.5)
And if, as will be shown, these current densities were equal, a single diffusion coefficient
would describe the dynamics. We next describe how such an equivalence arises and how
to express the current densities in terms of carrier gradients and in the process derive an
expression for the giant ambipolar diffuison constant, giantamb. diff.
D
In this dissertation we are concerned only with lateral carrier motion. Eq. (4.2) is
a separable equation and so treating the lateral components of the gradients alone, as in
75
e.g., Eq. (4.4), is a valid approach. In the equations below, 1�
� � �
� �� �� �
�∇ .
Furthermore, in this derivation of giant ambipolar diffusion, it is assumed that the
photogenerated electrons and holes have already separated in the vertical direction across
the intrinsic region of the device. The assumption of vertical photogenerated carrier
separation is not required and does not affect the calculation of the diffusion coefficient;
it does, however, allow for a simplification of some of the equations. Therefore, if n0 and
p0 are the concentrations of electron and hole ionized dopants,
0n n n� � � 0p p p� � � (4.6)
where n, p, n0, p0, �n, and �p are no longer per unit volume but rather per unit area: n is
the electron density integrated across the thickness of the n-region; p is the hole density
integrated across the p-region. Similarly, �n and �p are the photogenerated carrier
densities integrated across the doped layers assuming they have vertically separated.
Thus, n, p, �n, and �p are functions of just the lateral dimensions (�,��).
It is assumed that at any given time there is “local” charge neutrality at each
lateral “point” in space. Consequently, there is no net lateral flow of charge. In other
words, because
p n� � � (4.7)
which, when combined with Eq. (4.6), leads directly to
p n� �
�� �� � , (4.8)
we may write
n pj j� � (4.9)
in which jn and jp are the integrated lateral current densities in the n and p-layers.
The relationship between the quasi-Fermi levels and the carrier densities are
examined next. Changes in the number of available states result in the electron
quasi-Fermi level’s logarithmic dependence on the MB distribution of the carrier
density:[25].
. lnstatmechn i
i
nE kTn
�� �
� � � �� �
(4.10)
76
where Ei is the Fermi level in the intrinsic region, T is the temperature, ni is the intrinsic
carrier concentration, and .
.statmechn� is the quasi-Fermi level due to this statistical
mechanics-based effect. Changes in the electron density therefore result in logarithmic
changes to the electron quasi-Fermi level. A similar relationship exists for changes in
hole carrier density and .
.statmechp� . Because the changes in electron and hole carrier densities
are equal (Eq. (4.7)), the change in both quasi-Fermi levels may be well described by
referring only to changes in electron or hole density. For example, the hole quasi-Fermi
level can be expressed as a function just of changes in electron density. Starting with.
. ln( )statmechp p� � (4.11a)
we can write.
.statmechp p�� � � (4.11b)
But because n p� � � , the hole quasi-Fermi level may be expressed as.
.statmechp n�� � � (4.11c)
We can also examine the difference between the quasi-Fermi levels:
np n p� � �� � (4.12)
Changes in np� can thus be expressed either as a function of changes in n or as a function
of changes in p. It is also critical to account for the effect that carrier separation has on
the quasi-Fermi levels. The quasi-Fermi levels separation is directly proportional to the
voltage across the intrinsic region which itself is strongly determined by the electric field
due to carrier separation and thus depends (linearly) on the changes in separated
photogenerated carrier density. Hence,chargeseparationnp n� � � (4.13)
where �n is the separated carrier density and chargeseparationnp� is the quasi-Fermi level difference
due to the resulting voltage change. Combining both the electrostatic and statistical
mechanic dependencies of the photogenerated carrier densities,
77
. .. .( )
charge stat statseparation mech mech
np np n p� � � �� � � (4.14)
All the terms on the right hand side of Eq. (4.14) are one-to-one functions of the changes
in either carrier density, e.g., �n, as shown by Eqs. (4.10), (4.11c), and (4.13).
Because the relationship between carrier density and quasi-Fermi level is
monotonic (one-to-one), it may be inverted. Thus, the changes or the gradient in carrier
density are a function of np� .
� � np
np
nn
�
��
� �
���
� �
�
�� (4.15)
It is assumed that np� has no z (vertical) dependence; this is equivalent to assuming
well-defined, constant quasi-Fermi levels across the n and p regions.
Combining Eq. (4.15) with Eq. (4.8), we find that
� �� �n p
np
nn p
� � � �
�� �
�
�� � �
�
� � � �� � � � (4.16)
Note the dependence on �. Finally, by combining Eq. (4.16) with Eq. (4.9) and Eq. (4.4)
and recalling that conductivity and mobility are related by the expression q n� �� ,
where q is the unit charge and n is the charge density,iv the relationship between the
gradients of quasi-Fermi level and current density may be found:
1
1
npn
n
p
nn� �
��
�
�
��
�� ��� �
�
�
�� � (4.17)
For electrons n n� ��� ��� � ; a similar expression exists for holes. Using Eq. (4.9),
Eq. (4.6) may now be written as
p nj qD p qD n j� �
� � � �� �� � (4.18)
with D an as-of-yet undefined proportionality constant – the diffusion coefficient.
Therefore, by substituting Eq. (4.17) into Eq. (4.18) the diffusion coefficient is found to
be
iv As the combination of Eqs. (4.10), (4.11c), and (4.13) in Eq. (4.14) suggests, np
n��
�
is a well-defined
quantity.
78
giant 2amb. diff.
1 n p np
n p
D Dq n
� � �
� �
�� �
� �(4.19)
As can be seen, this diffusion coefficient is directly related to the separation of the
quasi-Fermi levels and how quickly this energy difference changes with the carrier
density of separated photogenerated carriers, as had been suggested by the qualitative
description above. Investigations of giant ambipolar diffusion have measured diffusion
coefficients on the order of 104 V/cm2.[26]
The assumption of MB statistics is usually appropriate in silicon devices. In
AlGaAs material systems, however, degenerate electron populations are reached at lower
doping levels. This is not correctly modeled when a MB distribution is assumed.
Degeneracy increases the diffusion coefficient for ambipolar diffusion: in GaAs at room
temperature, the diffusion coefficient rises from about 40 to 130 cm2/sec as the electron
density grows from 1018 to 5x1019 cm-3 while in silicon it rises from approximately 20 to
60 cm2/sec as the carrier density grows from 1019 to 1021 cm-3.[6] This effect is likely
due to a higher effective temperature in degenerate systems, particularly of those carriers
that contribute to diffusion at the edge of the Fermi-sphere. This increase principally
affects the diffusion term, not the drift term, of a drift-diffusion equation. Since
enhanced diffusion is principally based on an effective induced drift,v a similar
proportional increase with carrier density and degeneracy is not expected. This suggests
that there will be only a small underestimation of the diffusion coefficient in degenerate
systems due to the assumption of a MB distribution in giant ambipolar diffusion. In fact,
the size of this error should be similar in magnitude to that due to the assumption of a
negligible diffusion term in diffusive conduction.
4.1.4 Diffusive conductionEquations governing the voltage behavior may be derived using a discrete
element approach to the problem. From the perspective of this paper, the simplification
v Recall, the gradient of the difference between the quasi-Fermi levels is similar to an induced electric fieldand, therefore, behaves as a “drift” term in a drift-diffusion equation. The magnitude of this term is ordersof magnitude larger than regular diffusion coefficients. Behavior similar to diffusive conduction, in whichthe regular diffusion terms are simply dropped, is therefore not surprising.
79
in the diffusive conduction approach (i.e., 0nqD n �∇ ) compared to the standard
drift-diffusion equation results in the following charge transport equation:
j q nE�� (4.20)
which is simply Ohm’s law. For a p-i-n like structure this expression may be integrated
to show
2sqRdV I
d� ��� � (4.21)
where Rsq is the sum of the resistance per square of the n and p layers. By using this
particular derivative in the expression another assumption has been implicitly made:
current does not flow in the “vertical” direction. This is a reasonable approximation in a
reverse-biased diode. From Q=CV, the relationship used to provide the field’s
dependence on carrier density is
2AdI V C ddt
�� �� � (4.22)
where CA is the capacitance per unit area. Note that the local charge neutrality
relationship is implicitly assumed by using Q=CV.
A familiar manifestation of this phenomenon is signal propagation along a one
dimensional RC line (see Figure 4.3a). A voltage pulse travels along the line at a speed
determined by a diffusion coefficient proportional to its RC time constant, often much
more quickly than an individual electron may move. The equations that describe the
voltage are
dV IRdx
� � (4.23)
and
1dV dIdt C dx
� � (4.24)
Together, these equations provide a complete description of the voltage dynamics in the
form of a diffusion equation:2
x2
1dV V D Vdt RC x
�� �
�
�
� (4.25)
80
R
C
R1
R2
C
Figure 4.3: Schematic of 1D RC transmission line with a single (4.3a, left) or with two resistive planes(4.3b, right)
where D is the diffusion coefficient. For two resistors (Figure 4.3b), effective resistance
given by their sum:
1 2
1 1R ( )effective
DC R R C
� �
�
(4.26)
For the two-dimensional case, together equations (4.21) and (4.22) provide a
complete description of the voltage dynamics:
dV D Vdt �
�2
∇ (4.27)
The Laplacian is two-dimensional and the (voltage) diffusion coefficient is 1
sq A
DR C
�
where p layer n layersq sq sqR R R� �
� � and CA is the capacitance per unit area. This effective
diffusion coefficient depends on parameters (resistance and capacitance) that can be
controlled by proper device design. For the purpose of comparison, it is worth noting
that Eq. (4.27) may be equivalently written as
dn D ndt �
�2
∇ (4.28)
simply by using V=Q/C. Eq. (4.23) describes the diffusion of voltage, not individual
carrier motion. Similarly, Eq. (4.24) does not describe the diffusion of a particular
particle but rather an effective diffusion for the system of particles.
The resistances per square of the doped layers may be quite small (10’s-100’s �),
with a capacitance per �m2 on the order of 0.1 fF for a 1 �m thick intrinsic region.
81
Hence, the diffusion coefficient of diffusive conduction may be quite large, on the order
of 105 V/cm2 compared to a diffusion coefficient of only ~100 V/cm2 in bulk material.vi
If a pulse of light is incident on such a structure that is reverse biased and it is
absorbed in the intrinsic region, the photogenerated carriers vertically separate,vii
shielding the bias. This creates a lateral voltage distribution across the device face in the
shape of the incident pulse. If this pulse is Gaussian-shaped (as is typical), the analytical
solution to the differential diffusion equation is
� �� �
2
, exp4MV r t V
t D t� �
� �
� ��� �� � �� � � �� �� � (4.29)
where 20
2
TOTM
A
QVwC �
�� �� �� �
and 2
0 142
wD
�
� �� � �� �
, QTOT is the total charge of photogenerated
electrons, and w0 is the 1/e2 spot size radius.[8] In such cases, the voltage at the center of
the spot diffuses away with a predominantly hyperbolic time-dependence, �/(t+�). For a
properly designed device, the decay coefficient, �, may be on the order of picoseconds.
To reiterate, this fast diffusion is not a single carrier’s movement from the center
outwards. Rather it is the ensemble of electrons and holes across the whole extent of the
p and n regions each moving a small amount – just the same as when in a transmission
line the voltage signal is able to propagate much faster than an individual electron can.
Such voltage behavior has been verified.[10, 11, 27]
4.1.5 Comparison between approachesWhat is the relationship between the diffusion coefficients of diffusive
conduction, Eq. (4.27), and giant ambipolar diffusion, Eq. (4.19)? The answer is: they
vi The values for the diffusion coefficient of giant ambipolar diffusion and diffusive conduction presented inthis paper are measured results from test devices. Their values are different from each other simply due tothe differences in their material structure and doping compositions.vii In principle, the lateral voltage distribution could also cause the carriers in the intrinsic region to movehorizontally. We neglect such movement on the assumption that the spot radius, �0, is much larger than thethickness of the intrinsic region. Consequently, the lateral carrier gradient (and hence transport due toregular carrier diffusion) is small even when compared to the vertical carrier gradient.
82
are nearly the same. For these types of structures, the relationship between carrier
concentration and voltage is primarily linearviii
q n Q CV� � � (4.30)
Clearly, if voltage diffuses away at a given rate, the carrier concentration at that location
must change by a proportional amount. In this sense the similarity between the
microscopic and macroscopic approaches could be expected. This may be shown more
explicitly. Recalling thatix
1sqR l�
�� � (4.31)
where l is the thickness of the doped layers, we can write
� �1 1
1 1n p
n pn p sq sq
n p
l R R� �
� �
� �
� �
� ��
(4.32)
Usingx
np
n nV �
� ��
� �(4.33)
and
� �q n AlQCV V
��� �� �
(4.34)
the capacitance per unit area may be related to the quasi-Fermi level difference:
� �2 2np
A
q AlV q lqn n C C�� �
� � �� �
(4.35)
Combining this key relationship with Eq. (4.32) can then be used to show that, indeed,
� �giant diffusive2amb. diff. conduction
1 1 1n p npn p
n p Asq sq
D Dq n CR R
� � �
� �
�� � �
� � �(4.36)
viii This ignores the logarithmic dependence of the quasi-Fermi levels on electron and hole density. This isa reasonable approximation as the magnitude of the linear effects in practical examples are larger by two ormore orders of magnitude.ix Although the conductivity is related to the resistance, Eq. (4.28) disregards the distinction between theassumed Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution of giant ambipolar diffusion and the unrestricted distribution ofdiffusive conduction.x The charge density-voltage relationship of Eq. (4.34) implicitly describes a functional relationship of achange in both the electron and hole density that are “vertically” separated.
83
Diffusive conduction is anchored around V=IR, focusing on the voltage dynamics
of the system. If this is rewritten as I=V/R, the perspective changes, emphasizing carrier
dynamics. Giant ambipolar diffusion, on the other hand, starts from the expression for
current density, � �n n nj n r� �� � . When this relationship is now compared to I=V/R, the
similarities become easy to see.
4.1.6 Uses, limits and limitations of enhanced diffusionThe different approaches have different advantages aside from whether one is
more interested in carrier or voltage dynamics. The diffusive conduction approach lends
itself well, for example, to modeling the coupled behavior in multiple-layer devices, such
as for a p-i-n-i-p or more general n-i-p-i structures.[27] An interesting feature that
diffusive conduction brings to light is that enhanced diffusion may occur before the
photogenerated carriers finish vertically separating. This is discussed also in Chapter 7
(see Fig. 7.2). As the photogenerated carriers begin to separate, they alter the voltage
across the intrinsic region. This voltage change immediately starts to diffuse away as the
free carriers in the doped regions respond to this localized voltage change. In fact, in
such a case the photogenerated carriers themselves are not directly involved in any lateral
diffusion in the system! This effect may be used, for example, in heterostructures where
the photogenerated carriers may find it difficult to cross over the barriers at the interfaces
between the intrinsic and doped regions. Nevertheless, the change in voltage their vertical
motion engenders may quickly diffuse away. This behavior is not clearly reflected in
giant ambipolar diffusion due to the assumption, in the derivation presented here (see Eq.
(4.19)), of the photogenerated carriers already being vertically separated and present in
the doped regions (recall we ignored the vertical transport responsible for that). If this
assumption was not made, the diffusion coefficient would not change, but the initial free
carriers in the doped regions would not drop out of the equations; it is those free carriers
that would then be responsible for the enhanced diffusion.
Having identified the assumptions made in deriving diffusive conduction and
giant ambipolar diffusion, we are now in a position to consider the effects on diffusive
conduction when some of the assumptions made in using the drift-diffusion equation fail.
When large (lateral) electric fields are present, the current density ceases to be a linear
84
function of field (e.g., mobility becomes field-dependent); as the saturated drift velocity
is reached carrier transport is no longer well described by Ohm’s law. Diffusion,
consequently, tends not be as large as expected.[22] This situation may arise when a
large number of photogenerated carriers are created within a small spot size and separate,
creating a large shielding voltage.
If the lateral device dimensions are small (e.g., on the order of 0.1 �m in GaAs),
scattering events may not occur as the carriers move from one side of the device to the
other. Instead, carrier transport begins to approach that ballistic transport. Similarly, if
the diffusive conduction coefficient is very fast – with a time constant � less than 1 ps –
so that it is smaller than the expected scattering time, it becomes important to account for
ballistic transport. Both of these effects tend to limit the carrier motion.
For both large electric fields and fast diffusion times, a magnetic field
proportional to dE/dt is created. The magnetic field also changes as a function in time,
creating an electric field opposite to that of the shielding field. The result is slowing of
the diffusion. In the diffusive conduction approach this would be modeled by including
the inductance per unit area; giant ambipolar diffusion would add a � �q v B� � term to the
drift-diffusion equation with careful attention now having to be paid to the different
directions of current flow. The ultimate limiting case is a device with negligible
resistance per unit area (e.g., conductor-like doped regions). This situation is analogous
to a two-dimensional lossless transmission line; the voltage decay is limited by the speed
of light in the medium.
85
4.2 THEORY OF MULTILAYER DIFFUSIVE CONDUCTION
4.2.1 2-layer case
R A
C ABlayer 1
layer 2
R B
R C
C CB
x
Figure 4.4: Schematic of two-layer 1D RC structure.
The voltage behavior of a multiple layer structure in more complicated than in
p-i-n devices, where “layer” refers to a plane of capacitors sandwiched by resistors. A
2-layer structure is shown in Fig. 4.4. The voltage across any particular layer is coupled
to all of the resistances and capacitances of the entire structure, hence the analysis is more
involved.
To tackle this problem, first the coupled partial differential equations governing
voltage for the system are found. The equations are re-expressed in an eigenvector basis
for which analytic solutions are known. Finally, the dynamics of the original voltages are
expressed as a weighted sum of the eigenvectors. This process is explored in more detail
below.
For the two-layer structure, we may write (using Ohm’s law)
'A
A A A AdV V V I Rdx
�� � �
'C
C C C CdV V V I Rdx
�
� � � (4.37)
'B
B B B BdV V V I Rdx
�� � �
Kirchoff’s equations provide the relationships
86
AAB
dI Idx
� �
CCB
dI Idx
� � (4.38)
BAB CB
dI I Idx
� �
and, using � �Q CVt�
��
,
A
AB AB
AB AB
dII dVdx
C C dt
�� �� �� � � �
(4.39)
C
CB CB
CB CB
dII dVdx
C C dt
�� �� �� � � �
In the above equations, subscripts A, B, and C refer to the top, middle, and bottom
resistive planes of Fig. 4.4, respectively, while subscripts AB and CB refer to currents and
voltages across layer 1 and layer 2, respectively. These equations may be combined (e.g.
taking the derivative with respect to ‘x’ of Eq. (4.37) and combining with Eq. (4.38) to
substitute for IA, IB, and IC in Eq. (4.39)) so that they reduce to two coupled equations in
terms of the voltages of interest:22
2 2CBAB AB
A CVV VD
t x x�
� ��� �� �� �
� � ��
2 2
2 2CB CB AB
C AV V VD
t x x�
� �� � �� �� �
� � ��
where (4.40)
BA
B A
RR R
� �
�
BC
B C
RR R
� �
�
� �
1 1A
AB A C C
DC R R �
�
� � �
1 1C
CB C A A
DC R R �
�
�
Although these expressions have been written in terms of one-dimensional equations, the
general form holds for two dimensions as well.
87
It is worth examining the coupled relationship suggested by Eq. (4.40). The
coupling strength of the second diode is determined by the relative magnitude of the
resistance of the middle resistive plane that acts as a voltage divider. As this resistance
drops, the middle plane becomes more conducting, isolating the voltage behavior of one
layer from the other. Conversely, as the resistance in the middle rises, the coupling
increases until ultimately the device functions as if it contained only a single intrinsic
region with an effective capacitance of CAB and CCB in series.
We can rewrite the coupled equations in a matrix form
r
d U D Udt
�
� �
� ��� (4.41)
where r now refers to a polar coordinate variable (in place of �), r
1r r �
� �� �� �
�∇ , and
AB
CB
VU
V� �
� � �� �
� ;� � � �
� � � �
11 12
21 22
1 1 1
1 1 1
C
AB A C C AB A C C
A
CB C A A CB C A A
C R R C R RD DD
D DC R R C R R
�
� �
�
� �
�
�� �� �� �� � � �� �� � � ��� � �� �� ��
(4.42)
To decouple these equations, the eigenvalues �� and eigenvectors �� of D�
are
determined, from which the transformation matrix S�
is found, relating the eigenvectors
to the original voltages, U� .
U S��
�� � ;
1 1
1 1A A
A A A A
D DS
D D
� �
� �
�
� �
� �� �� �� ��� �� �� �
(4.43)
Next, the initial voltage conditions are transformed into the eigenvector basis:1
0 0S U��
�
� �� (4.44)
Hence, we may now write decoupled differential equations in which the diffusion
coefficients are simply the eigenvalues.
t� � �
���
�� �
�� (4.45)
88
where ��
is a diagonal matrix of the eigenvalues. It is, therefore, possible to solve for a
particular eigenvector (‘eigenvoltage’) ��(r,t) using the known solutions to the uncoupled
diffusion equation. Finally, these solutions may be transformed back into the original
basis set, providing the full dynamic response of the system:
� � � �, ,U r t S r t�
�
�� � (4.46)
As an example, if our initial condition is a Gaussian voltage distribution across
the first layer with no voltage across the bottom layer (this happens if a short pulse of
light is absorbed in the top diode and the photogenerated carriers are whisked rapidly to
the p and n layers, as occurs in the OCOG-2), we have
00 0
VU
� �� � �� �
� (4.47)
0 00
0
111 1
A A
V
D D
��
�
� �
�
�
� �
� � � �� �� � � �
�� � � �� � �� �� �� �
� (4.48)
where
� � � �2
22 11 22 11 22 11 12 2142
D D D D D D D D��
� � � � �
� (4.49)
(see Eq. (4.42) for a description of Dij). Using the decoupled solution to the diffusion
equation given a Gaussian distribution (Eq. (4.29)),
� �� �
20, exp
41 1A A
V rr tt t
D D
��
� � �
� �
�
�
� � �
� �
� �� �� � �� �� �� � �� �
� �
� (4.50)
where 20 1
2 4�
��
�
�
� and Equation (4.46),
� �� �
� �
� �
� �
1 1, ,
,, ,1 1
AB A A
CB
A A A A
V r t D D r tU r t
V r t r tD D
� � �
�
� �
� � �
�
� �� �� �� � � �� �� �� � � �� �� � � �� �� �
� (4.51)
we find that at the center of the pulse (r=0) the voltages are given by
89
� �
� �
0 0
0
1 10,0, 1
1 1
A A
A AAB
CB
A A
A A
V Vt tD D
D DV r tV r t V
D t tD D
� �
� �� �
� �
� �
� � �
� �
� �
� �� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� ��� �� �� � � �� �� �� �� � � �
� �� ��� � � � � � �� �
� �� �� �� � �� �� � � �� ��� �� �� �� �
(4.52)
Looking carefully at this result, we see that the voltage dynamics are governed by
two eigenvalue diffusive time constants, �+ and �-. If RA and RC << RB, �+ is very small
compared to �-. The voltage across the bottom diode, VCB, at first grows at a rate
primarily determined by �-, while VAB falls equally fast. After this increase, both VCB and
VAB decay at the (slower) rate determined by �-. This is shown in Fig. 4.5, validating our
more approximate original statement that highly conducting top-most and bottom-most
layers “hold the voltage constant across the device,” and the subsequent implication that
the voltage of the bottom diode mimics the opposite behavior of the top diode.
0 2 4 6 8 100.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Vol
tage
(a.u
.)
Time (ps)
Figure 4.5: Bottom diode voltage behavior (-VCB) at pulse center (r=0). Note the two separate behaviors: avery fast rise time (hence voltage across entire device essentially kept constant) and a slower fall time dueto an impulse voltage on the top diode. The specific parameters used were the capacitance per unit area of
each of thee three depletion regions, C� =[0.67, 1.58, 0.10] fF/�m2, the resistance per square of each of thefour resistive planes, R� =[20, 300, 2000, 25] ohms per square, and the pot size radius, 3.5 �m.
4.2.2 N-layer caseThe analysis described above may be extended in a straightforward manner to
describe the voltage dynamics of a device with an arbitrary number of layers. This
90
general approach is composed of four steps: (1) determine the coupling diffusion matrix
D�
; (2) solve the eigenvector problem to describe a decoupled system; (3) apply the
solution to the regular (uncoupled) diffusion equation for the eigenvectors; (4) transform
the dynamic solution back to the original variables. Steps (2)-(4) are identical to those
just described. All that is left to do is determine the original coupling matrix, D�
.
Appendix B describes this process in more detail. The key result is that the voltage obeys
a diffusion equation
V D Vt
���
�
� �2∇ (4.53)
where D�
may be determined from the following relationship1 1
1[ ] 2[ ]
[ ]
1 1N N
N
D M MRC
� �� � �
�
� �(4.54)
The division of R� (a vector related to the resistance per square of each resistive plane)
and C� (the capacitance per unit area of each layer) mean element-by-element operations
instead of matrix operations, and 1
1[ ]NM�
�
and1
2[ ]NM�
�
are determined simply by the number
of layers. From this point forward the method described earlier in this section for
determining the voltage dynamics using eigenvalues and eigenvectors becomes
straightforward to apply.
4.2.3 DiscussionHaving the ability to accurately model the voltage behavior across multi-layer
resistive and capacitive stacks is essential for understanding a stacked diode OCOG. This
same analysis method may also be used to help study n-i-p-i devices. Multilayer
diffusive conduction analysis has also helped to reveal a useful insight. One might
suggest that adding extra layers simply presents extra resistance and capacitance,
reducing device speed. This is not the case. In fact, increasing the number of layers
significantly improves device speed.
The frequency response of an electrical RC filter chain circuit provides a good
analogy for multilayer OCOG behavior. Adding an extra RC filter changes the electrical
91
circuit’s filter response: each RC filter adds an extra 6 dB/octave decay, modified by the
extra load it adds.[28] In OCOGs, the presence of extra layers significantly speeds up the
voltage decay response, although at a cost of reduced voltage swing. This is particularly
relevant for diffusive conduction behavior since its single layer hyperbolic decay, �/(�+t),
although initially fast, slows down considerably at times large with respect to the
diffusion coefficient time constant, �. The time it takes a voltage pulse to fall by 90%, for
example, equals 9 �. The presence of multiple layers provides a method that enables the
voltage to drop more much more rapidly even at longer times. The result is not simply a
faster effective diffusion time constant; rather, the response function itself is changed,
more closely resembling the multiplication of the individual diffusive conduction decays.
92
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.00.00
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50 2 layers
3 layers
4 layers
5 layers
Rel
ativ
e C
hang
e in
Vol
tage
(a.
u.)
Time (ps)
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.00.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0 2 layers
3 layers
4 layers
5 layers
Nor
mal
ized
Cha
nge
in V
olta
ge
Time (ps)
Figure 4.6: (4.6a; top) Response of the bottom-most layer of a multilayer device when a unit voltagechange due to voltage shielding is placed across the top-most (control diode) layer for devices with anincreasing number of layers. Although the induced change in voltage is reduced, as the number of layersincreases the voltage decay function falls off faster than a hyberbolic decay. (4.6b; bottom) Thenormalized response of Fig. 4.6a. Simulation parameters were a spot size radius of 5 �m,R=[10; ..1000… ; 10] ���, and C=[0.3; ..0.3… ; 0.3] fF/�m2.
In Fig. 4.6a the voltage behavior across the bottom-most layer of a device is
graphed for a series of devices with progressively more layers assuming unit voltage
shielding is suddenly created across the top (control diode) layer. The magnitude of
induced voltage change diminishes as the number of layers increases. In essence, the
device has become a voltage divider. In addition, though, it is important to notice that the
decay of the induced voltage increases substantially as the number of layers increases,
falling faster than a hyperbolic decay. Comparing normalized data, Fig. 4.6b, makes this
93
point clearer. This may be of critical importance if fast turn-off times are required.
Without this change in the response function, faster turn-off times come at the large
expense of a dramatically reduced magnitude of voltage change (much more than the
reduction due to adding extra layers).xi This behavior is the 2-D analog of the sharper
filter response that arises in an RC filter chain as more RC filters are added.
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 350.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0 Data
3-Layer Simulation
2-Layer Simulation
Cha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity (
a. u
.)
Time (ps)
Figure 4.7: Small signal response of the OCOG-3 compared to simulations of both 3 and 2-layer structures.Note the dramatic improvement in the device recovery as the number of layers increases.
The benefit of multiple layers can be clearly seen in Fig. 4.7. The dual diode
p-i-n-p-i-n OCOG-3 structure actually contains three depletion regions: two intrinsic
regions in the top and bottom diodes and one from the depletion region between the
middle n and p regions. Hence, a dual diode can in fact be a three layer structure. The
simulation of the OCOG-3 device was modeled with three layers of capacitance
(C� =[0.67; 1.58; 0.10] fF/�m2), each sandwiched by a layer of resistance
( R� =[20; 300; 2000; 25] ���) with these parameters based on measured or calculated
values. As Fig. 4.7 shows, when contrasted against a comparable two-layer structure
(e.g. ignoring the middle depletion region, equivalent to a n-i-p-i-n OCOG-2-like device
with C� =[0.67; 0.10] fF/�m2 and R� =[20; 300; 25] ���), the three-layer simulation
exhibits a much sharper response and is a significantly better fit to the data. The xi In point of fact, adding extra layers does result in a correspondingly smaller effective capacitance andresistance per unit area, which would itself result in a sharper voltage decay. However, the decay response
94
separation between when the rising and falling edges of the gate are at 10% of the peak
voltage change -- the full-width 10%-of-maxium (FW10%M) value -- of the simulated
two layer structure (22 ps) takes nearly twice as long as the three layer device (13 ps).
is actually faster than that due to the modified effective time constant, �effective; it falls off faster than�effective /���effective +t).
95
REFERENCES
1. Roosbroeck, W.v., "The Transport of Added Current Carriers in a Homogenoussemiconductor," Phys. Rev., vol. 91, pp. 282 (1953).
2. McKelvey, J.P., Solid State and Semiconductor Physics. Vol. Chapter 10, (RobertKreiger Publ. Co., Malabar, Florida, 1966).
3. Schetzina, J.F. and J.P. McKelvey, "Ambipolar Transport of Electrons and Holesin Anisotropic Crystals," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 2, pp. 1869-1874 (1970).
4. Shah, R.M. and J.F. Schetzina, "Excess-Carrier Transport in AnisotropicSemiconductors: The Photovoltaic effect," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 5, pp. 4014-4021(1972).
5. Ritter, D., E. Zeldov, and K. Weiser, "Ambipolar transport in amorphoussemiconductors in the lifetime and relaxation-time regimes investigated bysteady-state photocarrier grating technique," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 38, pp. 8296(1988).
6. Young, J.F. and H.M.v. Driel, "Ambipolar diffusion of high-density electrons andholes in Ge, Si, and GaAs: Many-body effects," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 26, pp. 2147-2158 (1982).
7. Lin, H., et al., "Anomalous In-Plane Drift and Diffusion Of Non-EquilibriumCharge Carriers In n-i-p-i Doping Superlattices," Surf. Sci., vol. 228, pp. 500-503(1990).
8. Livescu, G., et al., "High-speed absorption recovery in quantum well diodes bydiffusive electrical conduction," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 54, pp. 748-750 (1989).
9. Schneider, H., et al., "Diffusive electrical conduction in high-speed p-i-nphotodetectors," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 60, pp. 2648-2650 (1992).
10. Yang, C.-M., et al., "Measurement of Effective Drift Velocities of Electrons andHoles in Shallow Multiple-Quantum-Well p-i-n Modulators," IEEE J. Quant.Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1498-1506 (1997).
11. Yairi, M.B., et al., "High-speed, otically controlled surface-normal optical switchbased on diffusive conduction," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 75, pp. 597-599 (1999).
12. Bradley, P.J., C. Rigo, and A. Stano, "Carrier Induced Transient Electric Field ina p-i-n InP-InGaAs Multiple-Quantum-Well Modulator," IEEE J. Quant. Elec.,vol. 32, pp. 43 (1996).
13. Ershov, M., "Lateral photocurrent spreading in single quantum well infraredphotodetectors," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 72, pp. 2865 (1998).
96
14. Streb, D., et al., "Extremely fast ambipolar diffusion in n-i-p-i dopingsuperlattices investigated by an all-optical pump-and-probe technique,"Superlattices and Microstructures, vol. 25, pp. 21-27 (1999).
15. Hutchings, D.C., C.B. Park, and A. Miller, "Modeling of cross-well carriertransport in a multiple quantum well modulator," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 59, pp.3009-3011 (1991).
16. Capasso, F., K. Mohammed, and A.Y. Cho, "Resonant Tunneling ThroughDouble Barriers, Perpendicular Quantum Transpot Phenomena in Superlattices,and Their Device Applications," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 22, pp. 1853 (1986).
17. Fraenkel, A., et al., "Vertical drift mobility of excited carriers in multi quantumwell structures," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 75, pp. 3536 (1994).
18. Dentan, M. and B.d. Cremoux, "Numerical Simulation of the Nonlinear responseof a p-i-n Photodiode under High Illumination," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 8, pp.1137 (1990).
19. Rosencher, E., et al., "Emission and capture of electrons in Multiquantum-WellStructures," IEEE Trans. Quant. Elec., vol. 30, pp. 2875 (1994).
20. Poole, P.J., et al., "All-optical measurement of the giant ambipolar diffusionconstant in a hetero-nipi reflection modulator," Semicond. Sci. Tech., vol. 8, pp.1750-1754 (1993).
21. Harrison, W.A., Solid State Theory (General Publishing Company, Toronto,1979).
22. Lundstrom, M., Fundamentals of Carrier Transport. Modular Series on SolidState Devices, ed. G.W. Neudeck and R.F. Pierret. Vol. X, (Addison-Wesley,Reading, MA, 1990).
23. Herring, C., "Thoery of Transient Phenomena in the Transport of Holes in anExcess Semiconductor," Bell Sys. Tech. J., vol. 28, pp. 401 (1949).
24. Gulden, K.H., et al., "Giant Ambiploar Diffusion Constant of n-i-p-i DopingSuperlattices," Phys. Rev. Lett., vol. 66, pp. 373-376 (1991).
25. Pierret, R.F., Semiconductor Device Fundamentals (Addison-Wesley Publishing,Reading, Mass., 1996).
26. Streb, D., et al., "Carrier density dependence of the ambipolar diffusioncoefficient in GaAs n-i-p structures," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 71, pp. 1501-1503(1997).
27. Yairi, M.B., H.V. Demir, and D.A.B. Miller, "Optically controlled optical gatewith an optoelectronic dual diode structure - theory and experiment," Optical andQuant. Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1035-1054 (2001).
97
28. Horowitz, P. and W. Hill, The Art of Electronics (Cambridge University Press,England, 1980).
98
Chapter V: Experimental Methodology
This chapter discusses the methodology used in the experiments. Descriptions of
the device growth, device processing, and device characterization are presented as are
details of the test-bed used for data collection.
5.1 DEVICE GROWTH
The OCOG devices were grown by solid source molecular beam epitaxy (MBE)
on either n+ or undoped GaAs (001) wafers. For each dopant, three test samples were
grown, each at a different growth temperature. Hall-measurements of these samples were
then taken and provided the basis to determine the activated doping value as a function of
temperature to within a factor of about two. In situ reflection high-energy electron
diffraction (RHEED) measurements were made just before device growth to determine
the growth rate of thin layers, such as quantum wells. For some devices, multiple
half-wavelength layers were grown and monitored using the reflection from the wafer of
a temperature-stabilized, 990 nm diode laser. The temperature dependence of the index
of refraction for GaAs and AlAs was calculated using the functional dependence
provided by [1]; the index for a particular AlxG1-xaAs material was approximated using a
linear combination of the GaAs and AlAs values. Growth rate calibrations for thick
layers (e.g. DBR layers) were thereby determined by using the measured period between
peaks in the reflection histogram and the appropriate index of refraction. For all the
devices, samples consisting of just the DBR mirror or the p-i (MQW)-n regions were
separately grown and tested (by taking photocurrent and reflectivity data as described
below) to make sure that the high-reflection bandwidth region of the DBR stack and the
voltage-dependent heavy-hole exciton peak were well overlapped.
5.2 DEVICE PROCESSING
All of the OCOG devices were processed in a similar manner. A set of masks
was designed and patterned that enabled up to four separate layers to be defined and
separately contacted. Standard lithography and wet etching were used to create devices
99
approximately 300x300 �m square. For accurate etching depths, thin 50 angstrom AlAs
stop-etch layers were included in the growth structure to stop citric acid etches through
AlGaAs layers; these stop-etch layers themselves were subsequently etched using a
hydrochloric acid mixture. Ohmic ring contacts (for an example, see Fig. 5.1) were made
to individual p and n layers by evaporating Ti/Au and Ge/Au/Ge/Au/Ni/Au compositions,
respectively. The contacts to n layers were annealed using a rapid thermal annealer
(440oC, 30 seconds) and were processed before any p layer contacts were deposited.
Silicon-nitride, SiN3, with a thickness ~104 nm, was typically deposited as an
antireflection coating centered at 850 nm; these AR coats were patterned by dry etching
using CF4 and O2 in a plasma asher (Phlegmatron). Finally, the processed wafers were
mounted on a ceramic 12-pin chip mount and wire-bonded. For the OCOG-3 devices, in
order to increase the conductivity of the top p-layer, 660 nm of indium-tin-oxide (ITO)
was deposited and annealed (500oC, 5 minutes); this layer also acted as an anti-reflection
coating in place of silicon-nitride. (The ITO used was 75% absorbing instead of an
expected 5-10%. We believe this was due to deposition difficulties and not inherent to
the device processing. Consequently, the ITO absorption has been discounted in
reflectivity and power calculations of Chapter 6.)
100
AR coating
Metalic rings
Bond pad
1st mesa 2nd mesa
Wire bonds
Figure 5.1: Image of a wire-bonded OCOG-2 device. The central square is the silicon-nitrideanti-reflection coating. The square concentric metallic rings and bond pads (100 �m square) contact the topn, p, and bottom n layers of the device.
5.3 DEVICE CHARACTERIZATION
5.3.1 Electrical characterizationTwo types of electrical characterization were conducted. A four-point probe
technique was used to determine the resistance per square of individual doped layers.
Four contacts, either soldered indium bumps or deposited ohmic contacts (the same as
described above), were approximately evenly placed in a row on a doped layer. A
ramped current was forced between two outer contacts while the induced voltage between
the two inner contacts was recorded by a parameter analyzer. The resistance equaled the
slope, �V/�I, multiplied by a correction factor of 4.53 for this geometry.[2]
The I-V curves of p-i-n stacks and p-n junctions were also measured. Of
particular interest was the reverse break-down voltage of the p-i-n and p-i(MQW)-n
layers; this revealed not only if a device might be functional, but also the maximum
voltage shift possible to induce in the device for appropriate layers. Moreover, it
provided a measurement of the dark current. For OCOG-2 and OCOG-3 devices, the
101
reverse-biased I-V dependence under optical illumination provided the means to
determine whether or not the top diode fully absorbed the control pulse and if it was
transparent to the signal pulse by measuring whether or not current was induced in the
bottom or top diode, respectively.
5.3.2 Optical characterizationComplete photocurrent spectra were obtained by measuring the current across a
p-i(MQW)-n diode layer in conjunction with a chopper and lock-in amplifier. This was
done while the applied reverse bias voltage as well as the wavelength of incident light,
were changed. Three light sources were used: a 0.25 meter SPEX spectrometer when
extended wavelength ranges (50-300 nm ranges) were desired; a Coherent continuous
wave tunable Ti-Sapphire laser for more accurate spectra; and, for femtosecond pulse
device response, the Tsunami Ti-Sapphire mode-locked tunable laser. Fig. 5.2 is an
example of typical spectra. Reflectivity as a function of voltage and wavelength spectra
were recorded in a similar method using a silicon photodetector, as exemplified by
Fig. 5.3.
102
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1410
1415
1420
1425
1430
1435
1440
1445
1450
1455
1460
1465
1470
1475
Reverse Bias Voltage (V)
Pho
ton
Ene
rgy
(meV
)
Figure 5.2: Contour graph of photocurrent spectra of OCOG-1 in arbitrary units. Photocurrent increases from nearzero (blue) to larger values (red). The quadratic shift in energy with voltage of both the heavy and light hole excitonpeaks are clearly resolved. Strong inter-well coupling effects may also be seen. See Appendix B for a moredetailed analysis.
0 2 4 6 8 100.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Wavelength (nm)
870
868
865
863
860
858
855
853
Abs
olut
e R
efle
ctiv
ity
Reverse Bias Voltage (V)
Figure 5.3: OCOG-1 reflectivity as a function of reverse bias for various wavelengths of picosecond pulses.
103
5.4 PUMP-PROBE SET-UP
5.4.1 General descriptionExperimental investigations of the dynamic response of OCOG devices were
conducted using a standard pump-probe technique. Light pulses were generated by a
tunable Spectra Physics Tsunami Ti-Sapphire laser that was able to provide pulse widths
either 1-2 ps or about 80 fs long (depending on the internal setting of the laser) at a
repetition rate of 82 MHz. A given pulse was split to create a strong control (pump)
pulse and a weaker signal (probe) pulse. The dynamics of the OCOG devices were
studied by adjusting the path lengths of the control and signal beams so that the time
between the arrival of the two pulses could be finely controlled. Many reflectivity data
could be measured for any given time separation between control and signal. Hence, by
changing the relative separation in time between control and signal, the reflectivity of a
given device could be mapped out, e.g. at 0 ps separation, 0.1 ps, 1 ps, or 1000 ps. By
steadily adjusting the path length difference using a translation stage run by a
stepper-motor control, the time-dependent responses of OCOG devices were obtained
with femtosecond-scale resolution. A schematic of the optical bench set-up may be seen
in Fig. 5.4 and images of the actual optical bench equipment used in Fig.5.5.
104
Imaging optics
Lock-inDelay stage
TiSapphirefemptosecondlaser ~850nm
Device Voltage Control
PD
DPSSL532nm
2nd Harmonic Generation(BBO Crystal)
~425nm
Computer
Spectral and Polarization Filters
21
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 5.4: Schematic of optical pump-probe set-up. (1) tunable short pulse laser (Tsunami), (2) beamsplitter where pump and probe are separated, (3) BBO crystal used for 2nd harmonic generation,(4) retroflector on a variable delay stage, (5) beam splitter for recollimating pump and probe beams,(6) focusing lens, (7) OCOG device, (8) chopper, (9) photodetector, (10) lock-in amplifier, (11) imagingoptics, (12) voltage supplies.
105
1
2
3
4 5
6
10
12
5
10
6 7
8
9
11
4
Figure 5.5: Photographs of pump-probe set-up. The circled numbers correspond to the same numbereditems in Fig. 5. (1) tunable short pulse laser (Tsunami), (2) beam splitter where pump and probe areseparated, (3) BBO crystal used for 2nd harmonic generation, (4) retroflector on a variable delay stage,(5) beam splitter for recollimating pump and probe beams, (6) focusing lens, (7) OCOG device,(8) chopper, (9) photodetector, (10) lock-in amplifier, (11) imaging optics, (12) voltage supplies.
106
5.4.2 Second-harmonic generationIn the OCOG-2 and OCOG-3 experiments the frequency of the control pulse had
to be sufficiently larger than the signal pulse so that the top diode was strongly absorbing
of the control pulse yet transparent to the signal beam. To accomplish this, the frequency
of the control pulse was doubled (to approximately 425 nm) by using a pair of 10 cm
lenses to focus and subsequently recollimate the linearly polarized pump beam on a
properly oriented 1 mm thick BBO crystal. The polarization of the resulting
second-harmonic generated (SHG) light was perpendicular to the original pump light.
Following recollimation, the remainder of the original pump pulse was separated from
the SHG light using both polarizing and dichroic beam splitters as well as a low-pass
wavelength filter. Although the magnitude of the frequency difference between the
control and signal pulses was much larger than required by the OCOG devices, SHG was
used due to its relative ease of implementation.
1, 2, 3, 4
1, 3
2, 41
2
Figure 5.6: Optical sub-system for generating a 4-pulse bit stream. It consisted of a large beam splittersurrounded by four retroflectors, two of which (the left and right) were mounted on translation stages. Apulse of light entered from the left and split near the top-right of the beam splitter (beams 1 and 2); thosepulses were retroreflected and split again into a total of two groups of two pulses (1,3 and 2,4); finally, afteragain being retroflected, the pulses were overlapped and split once more. Half the light went to a beamdump (exiting the ‘top’ of the beam splitter in the figure) while the other half (pulses 1,2,3,4) exited on theright-hand side, continuing down the beam path.
107
5.4.3 Creation of 4-pulse burst data streamThe response of the device to multiple optical pulses was tested using a stream of
four control pulses that were focused onto the device. This type of pulse stream was
created using a large beam splitter (5 cm x 5 cm) and four corner cubes, one on each side
of the beam splitter, as illustrated in Fig 5.6. A single control pulse would pass through
the beam splitter and divide in half. Each of these two beams was reflected from a corner
cube back into the beam splitter and, consequently, split again. With careful alignment,
the initial two beams overlapped each other at that point. The result was four beams (two
pairs of two) that, in turn, were retroreflected by two more corner cubes and aligned to
overlap once more in the beam splitter before splitting a third time. The final result was
eight beams (two groups of four), half of which went to a beam dump and the other half
of which exited the beam splitter spatially overlapped to continue down-stream. Each of
these remaining beams was thus retroreflected from a unique combination of two of the
four corner cubes. As a result, by varying the individual corner cubes’ distances from the
beam splitter, it was possible to control each pulse’s relative time delay with respect to
the others. Because of the multiple splittings and reflections involved in creating the
pulse stream, the final power in each pulse was limited to the small-signal regime
(~1.3 pJ/pulse).
108
REFERENCES
1. Gehrsitz, S., et al., "The refractive index of AlxGa1-xAs below the band gap:Accurate determination and empirical modeling," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 87, pp.7825-7837 (2000).
2. Sze, S.M., Physics of Semiconductor Devices. 2nd Ed. ed (John Wiley and Sons,New York, 1981).
109
Chapter VI: Results and Analysis
In this chapter the experimental results of the switching behavior of the three
generations of OCOG devices are presented along with their simulated theoretical
responses. The close match between the simulations and data provide strong evidence
not only that our hypothesis that diffusive conduction is responsible for the switching
behavior but also that our models of the spatio-temporal response of multilayer structures
are reasonable.
6.1 FIRST GENERATION OCOG-1The first generation optically controlled optical gate, OCOG-1, was a simple
p-i(MQW)-n diode grown on top of a DBR mirror. The one micron thick Al10Ga90As p
and n layers were doped with beryllium and silicon, respectively, at a density of about
1018 atoms/cm3. The intrinsic region contained 94 GaAs quantum wells each 100 Å wide
and separated by extremely thin, 5 Å AlAs barriers. A Si3N4 antireflection coating was
deposited, centered at 850 nm. (Detailed descriptions of all generations of OCOG
structures can be found in Appendix C.) This device was grown to demonstrate that
diffusive conduction could be used as a switching mechanism for optical gates.
Quantum Well Stack
BraggMirror
p
n
300 �m
1 �m
i
Control
Signal
n
Figure 6.1: Schematic drawing of OCOG-1 p-i(MQW)-n structure.
110
The switching behavior of the OCOG-1 device is strongly influenced by carrier
motion. To allow the device to “turn-on”, the photogenerated electrons and holes must
separate, first escaping from the QWs and then moving toward the n and p layers,
respectively. In GaAs, at fields above roughly 1 V/�m charge carrier motion reaches
saturated drift velocities, moving at speeds near 0.1 �m/ps.[1] Hence, under such
conditions it takes approximately 10 picoseconds for an electron or hole to travel across a
one micron thick intrinsic region.
The other critical constraint on carrier motion is the escape time from the QWs.
There are a wide variety of avenues available for carriers to leave a quantum well. Two
principal methods are (1) to tunnel through the barrier or (2) to be thermally excited
above the barrier.[2-4] In the presence of an electric field, the wavefunction of the carrier
as well as the barrier shapes and wells are altered, modifying the escape mechanism.
This may have a significant effect on the escape time.
Numerous device structures for various applications have been designed to take
advantage of the different escape mechanisms. The strong coupling between QWs in
superlattices create mini-conduction bands that may be used to enhance carrier
sweep-out.[5] This is exemplified in quantum cascade lasers that rely on this behavior to
help empty the lowest energy state of their lasing structure and maintain a population
inversion.[6, 7] Extremely shallow quantum wells (ESQWs) have QW barrier heights
that are lower than the thermal energy (~25 meV), providing very rapid escape due to
thermal excitation.[8-10] Even modest electric fields (4 V/�m) reduce carrier
confinement sufficiently to eliminate exciton resonant absorption. ESQWs,
consequently, may be used in low-voltage switches.
One of the design goals of OCOG-1 was fast photogenerated carrier escape
combined with a structure that also allowed switching over a broad wavelength band.
ESQWs provide excellent escape times but have somewhat limited wavelength operation
due to the rapid extinction of the exciton peak. By using extremely thin barriers, it was
hoped that escape times could be enhanced while maintaining a wide operation
bandwidth. Transfer matrix method simulations [11, 12] of the ultra-thin barrier QWs
indicated that, as hoped, the exciton peak would significantly shift with voltage,
111
providing a wide wavelength operation region (see Appendix C). Escape times,
estimated from the resonance peak energy widths of the simulation (from 2 to about 20
ps), were slower than for ESQWs but sufficient for switching times faster than 100 ps.
6.1.1 Small signal experimental results and simulationAn example of the small-signal behavior of this device is shown in Fig. 6.2 using
a 60 fJ pump pulse with a 7 �m radius spot size at 860 nm with the device biased at
-8.3 V. Optically-controlled switching was clearly demonstrated, with a “turn-on” time
of about 17 ps and a “turn-off” time around 50 ps.
0 50 100 1500.45
0.46
0.47
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.51
0.52
Data
Simulation
Ref
lect
ivity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.2: OCOG-1 Small signal reflectivity data and simulation. The data was obtained using 860 nmlight with 20 �W control power and –8.36 V bias. Simulation parameters included D=0.4x105 cm2/s, 65 fJpulse energy, electron escape time = 3 ps, and hole escape time =20 ps.
Equally important, simulation results closely matched the data. The simulation
model included the following parameters:
� a Gaussian spatial distribution for the creation of electrons and holes based on the
spot size of the pulse
� effective escape times from the wells for both electrons and holes
112
� vertical field-dependent velocity – also for both carrier types
� a diffusion coefficient and voltage decay according to Eqs. (3.3)-(3.5)
� empirical results that provided absorption data as a function of bias voltage
The parameters used included a diffusion coefficient equal to 0.4x105 cm2/s, an electron
escape time of 3 ps, and a hole escape time of 20 ps. The close fit between data and the
simulations, particularly for the tails, provides strong support to the hypothesis that
diffusive conduction is, indeed, the mechanism primarily responsible for voltage decay.
Details of the simulation models used are described in Chapter 7.
The device recovery time was long, particularly in light of an expected voltage
diffusion coefficient on the order of a picosecond. We believe this may have been due to
a long hole escape time from the quantum wells. The long hole escape time would
provide a weak but extended “turn-on” time, preventing the device from quickly
recovering. Reducing the hole escape time, for instance by using lower QW barriers or a
tunneling-resonant device, should make this type of device much faster. Moreover, the
presence of these holes in the intrinsic region changes the spatial electric field screening
across the QWs which, when combined with the field-dependence of the absorption,
limits change in reflectivity.
6.1.2 Large signal experimental results and simulationUsing a 750 fJ pump pulse, OCOG-1 exhibited a large change in reflectivity such
as might be needed in a practical device. With a spot size of 7 �m radius (~5 fJ �m-2),
the control pulse was strongly absorbed by the heavy hole exciton with the laser tuned to
855 nm and the device biased at -6.3 V. As Fig. 6.3 shows, the probe pulse experienced
an absolute change in reflectivity of 0.3 with a contrast ratio of 1.8-to-1. The high
reflectivity state of the device induced by the pump pulse decayed within about 50 ps.
The device demonstrated this type of behavior when the laser was tuned between 855 and
865 nm, with the contrast ratio falling by about 30% at the high-wavelength end.
The energy needed for this switching was very low – less than one picojoule –
and compares favorably with the other switching mechanisms mentioned earlier. This
low level of required energy was possible due to the macroscopic motion of the
photogenerated carriers. The carriers from a single well, once reaching the n and p
113
regions, screened all of the QWs. Together, the carriers created in each of the 94 QWs
ultimately moved to create a much larger electric field change across any single QW than
would have been possible with carriers from that QW alone as described in Chapter 3.
Consequently, low switching energy arose naturally from the combination of strongly
field-dependent absorption of the QWs (the QCSE) and the macroscopic movement of
the photogenerated carriers across the entire width of intrinsic region.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
1500 fJ
750 fJ
375 fJ
Ref
lect
ivity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.3: OCOG-1 Reflectivity modulation of probe (signal) pulse as a function of time with -6.3 V biasacross device and 855 nm light at various pump (control) pulse powers with a spot size of 50 �m2.Simulation [solid lines] reflectivity modulation at various input powers. The good fit of the tails to ahyperbolic decay is a good indication that diffusive conduction is responsible for the voltage dissipation.
The response of the OCOG-1 device changes dramatically with large control
pulse power, as Fig. 6.3, comparing medium (375 fJ, 750 fJ) and large-signal (1500 fJ)
data to simulations, illustrates. At these energies, compared to small-signal behavior,
sufficient carriers are created so that once a small fraction of them have escaped from
their QWs and separated, the voltage across the device is significantly shielded. When
this occurs, the escape time of the remaining carriers (particularly electrons) increases
while, simultaneously, the drift velocity of the carriers decreases. Diffusive conduction
eats away at the shielding voltage and ultimately is responsible for enabling the
114
remaining carriers to be swept out. Nevertheless, strong shielding remains prevalent for
an extended period of time and results in a slower gating response function. The change
in reflectivity also approaches a limiting value, in part due to the maximum shift in
absorption possible of the quantum wells as well as the finite voltage shift that may be
shielded. And, as already mentioned, the trapped carriers (in particular, holes) also
strongly modify the field across various regions of the intrinsic region,
Although details of the simulations are presented in Chapter 7, it is worth
mentioning here that the carrier escape time is field-dependent, particularly for the
electrons. Rapid field screening at larger optical powers may have increased the average
expected escape time for carriers still trapped. For the three curves shown, reasonable fits
were found with electron escape times of 3, 5, 7, and 10 ps for pump powers of 65
(Fig. 6.2), 375, 750, and 1500 fJ (Fig. 6.3), respectively; this was the only parameter
aside from pump power that was varied between the simulations.
6.1.3 Signal gain (large signal) experimental results and simulation
0 30 60 90 120 1500.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Change
in R
efle
cted
Sign
al E
nerg
y/C
ontr
ol E
nerg
y
Time (ps)
Figure 6.4: Change in reflected probe (signal) power normalized against pump (control) pulse power –equivalent to signal gain with the device biased at -6.0 V, pump power of 750 fJ and probe power of2.56 pJ at 855 nm.
115
OCOG-1 also demonstrated the ability to provide signal gain similar to that of a
three-terminal device. From this perspective, the control signal is the pump pulse; the
probe pulse is another input, and the output is its reflection. When the probe power is
small with respect to that of the control signal, the induced changes in the output
(reflected probe power) are also small compared to the pump’s power. If the incoming
probe power, however, were made large compared to the pump, the changes in reflected
probe power could potentially be larger than the control signal itself – in effect creating
gain in the reflected signal. Figure 6.4 demonstrates this effect, showing gain close to a
factor of 2. It was difficult to obtain larger gain with the OCOG-1 device by simply
turning up the probe power. The percentage change in reflectivity induced by the control
signal dropped at such high probe powers; this is likely due to self-screening effects that
are negligible at lower powers.
6.2 SECOND GENERATION OCOG-26.2.1 Small signal experimental results and simulation
The expectation of OCOG-2 devices was that the use of separate control and
modulator sections, accomplished by using a dual-diode structure, would result in both
faster turn-on and turn-off of the device. As will be shown, this was indeed the case.
Moreover, the OCOG-2 was used to further test our models of how diffusive conduction
behavior affects voltage decay. Small-signal data, data for different spot sizes, data that
examined the off-center response of the device, and large-signal behavior are presented
and discussed in this section.
116
Control
Distributed BraggMirror (DBR)
1 �mQuantum
WellStack
300 �mSignal
0.1 �m50 nm
Top “Control” Diode
Bottom “Modulator”
Diode
i
p
i
n
ni
Figure 6.5: Schematic diagram of OCOG-2, an n-i-p-i (MQW)-n device structure on top of a DBR mirror.
The dual-diode OCOG-2 we used was an n-i-p-i(MQW)-n structure atop a DBR
mirror. Details of the MBE-grown OCOG-2 device are as follows: a DBR mirror
centered at 855 nm at room temperature composed of 25 periods of alternating
Al0.08Ga0.92As and AlAs was grown on top of an n-doped GaAs substrate, followed by a
short “cleaning” superlattice (30 periods of alternating layers, each 20 Å thick, of GaAs
and AlAs) which provided a smooth surface following the DBR growth. The
bottom-most Al0.08Ga0.92As n layer was 5,000 Å thick and doped at about 1018 atoms/cm3,
followed by 69 MQWs with 50 Å AlAs barriers and 95 Å GaAs wells. On top of this a
1.2 �m 1018 cm-3 p, 0.3 �m i, and 500 Å 1018 cm-3 n region of Al0.08Ga0.92As each were
successively grown (including a final n-doped 50 Å GaAs cap layer). Finally, an
antireflection Si3N4 layer was sputtered on top. 4-point probe measurements of the
resistivity (resistance per square) indicated the bottom n layer to be ~10 ��� while both
the p and top n layers were each ~300 ���, as had been designed. The contacts to the
doped layers were used to separately reverse bias the top and bottom diodes at -5.0 V
and –15 V, respectively.
The temporal device response to a control pulse was extracted by the previously
described pump-probe technique. A tunable short-pulse laser (Tsunami) was used to
provide ~80 fs pulses at 855 nm for the probe pulse while the control pulse was
frequency-doubled to 427 nm using a BBO crystal. This enabled the control beam to be
117
fully absorbed in the top diode while the wavelength of the signal pulse allowed it to
experience the voltage-sensitive absorption of the bottom diode. Recording the
reflectivity consequently provides an indirect measurement of the voltage dynamics of
the top diode.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Sim
Data
Nor
mal
ized
Cha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity (
a.u.
)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.6: Small-signal OCOG-2 device behavior and simulation (0.66 pJ). The close fit between thesimulation and data is strong support for a simulation model based on diffusive conduction and inducedvoltage change across the bottom diode.
Small-signal response is presented in Figure 6.6. Simulations (detailed below)
match the data well, supporting both the premise of induced voltage change across the
bottom modulator diode and a turn-off response due to diffusive conduction.
6.2.2 Further tests of diffusive conductionWe conducted two additional experiments to test our hypothesis that the voltage
decay was indeed due to diffusive conduction. For the first test, the small-signal response
was taken for a variety of different spot sizes. Recalling that the value of the diffusive
time constant, �, depends on the square of the spot size radius, w0, for a Gaussian pulse,
as expressed in Eq. 6.1:
118
20 1
42 voltagediffusion
wD
�
� �� � �� �
(6.1)
it was expected that the recovery time of the OCOG device would diminish as the spot
size shrank. The data was compared to a series of small-signal simulations in which the
spot size was varied. The results are presented in Fig. 6.7. The close fit between the
simulation and data lent strong support to the diffusive conduction hypothesis. If the
recovery had been due to relaxation through the external circuitry, for example, there
should have been no dependence on the spot size of the incident light.
0 5 10 15 20 25
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Spot Size Radius
2.6 �m
5.0 �m
7.0 �m
13.0 �m
Nor
mal
ized
Cha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.7: Comparison between data and simulation of OCOG-2 dynamics for a different values of theradius of the incident light pulse. The close fit between data and simulation is strong support for thehypothesis that recovery is based on diffusive conduction.
The second additional test of the diffusive conduction response examined the off-
axis response of the device. For almost all of the data presented in this dissertation, the
probe pulse was centered at the center of the incident pump pulse (r=0). Its reflectivity
was primarily determined by the voltage at spot center. To investigate off-center
response, the probe pulse was laterally displaced from the pump pulse. Equation (6.2)
expresses the radial dependence for a single-layer (OCOG-1) device.
119
� �� �
2
, exp4M
rV r t Vt D t�
� �
� ��� �� � �� � � �� �� �
(6.2)
The off-center, 0r � , response of diffusive conduction is distinct, as Eq. (6.2)
shows.i As the distance from the spot center increases, the initial rise-time of the voltage
shielding increases; it takes time for the initial shielding voltage to diffuse, increasing the
shielding at distant points. The turn-off time is also much longer; once the voltage
shielding does rise, its spatial gradient is much less (since it has already diffused from the
center of the spot), and so its decay is slow.
In a two-layer (OCOG-2) structure, off-center behavior is more complex. There
are two eigenmodes: eigenmode ( , )r t��
is the sum of the voltages across the top and the
bottom layers (the overall voltage across the device) while the other eigenmmode,
( , )r t��
, is the difference of the layers’ voltages. With highly conducting top-most and
bottom-most layers, the overall voltage ��
rapidly decays to near zero (the top and
bottom layers become oppositely biased while the longer decay time of ��
roughly
describes the voltage relaxation across a single layer. Each voltage eigenmode of the
system decays according to Eq. (6.2), dependent on its diffusion coefficient (eigenvalue)
– see Eq. (4.50). The voltage across a particular layer of the device decays as a weighted
sum of the eigenmodes.
As photogenerated carriers separate in the top layer, the voltage across that layer
is shielded. If such a voltage change were, instead, evenly distributed across both layers,
the reverse bias across the bottom diode would increase due to the reversed orientation of
its p and n layers compared to the top diode. On the other hand, if the overall voltage
change was zero, voltage shielding across the top layer would be mimicked by the
opposite voltage across the bottom layer, reducing the bottom layer’s reverse bias.
What happens in practice? (1) As photogenerated carriers separate in the top
layer, the overall voltage across the device does change, though it quickly relaxes due to
the highly conducting top-most and bottom-most layers – in essence, due to the fast
diffusion coefficient of ��
. At spot center, the overall voltage change is due entirely to
i OCOG-2 is a multilayer structure. Although Eq. (6.2) does not account for the multilayer behavior, itsradial dependence exhibits qualitatively the expected behavior.
120
the voltage across the top layer and so the voltage across the bottom layer never
increases. Off-center, however, that is not necessarily the case… (2) Because the
diffusion coefficient of the overall voltage (��
) is faster than that of the voltage across
the indivudual layers (��
), off center the overall voltage change rises faster than the
voltage in the top layer alone. The voltage across the bottom layer, consequently,
increases so that the sum of the top and bottom voltage changes equal the overall voltage
change. (3) As the overall voltage relaxes off-center (after it builds up), the top and
bottom layers become biased in opposite directions and grow as ��
continues to diffuse
into that region. (4) Eventually, ��
also decays and the change in voltages across both
the top and bottom layers drop to zero. These four steps have been illustrated in Fig. 6.8.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
On spot center Off spot center
Overall voltage change
Voltage change in top layer
Voltage change in bottom layer
Figure 6.8: Illustration of on-center and off-center behavior in an OCOG-2 device at four instances in time.(1) voltage change due to photogenerated carrier separation, (2) shortly after carrier separation in which theoverall voltage has begun to significantly diffuse outwards (rising at off-center points), (3) overall voltagehas effectively fully diffused but voltage across individual layers is still present, decaying much more
121
slowly, (4) voltage across individual layers significantly decayed. Note that at time (2) for some off-centerpoints the induced voltage change is temporarily opposite to what might otherwise be expected.
The results of the collected data and simulation for OCOG-2 are presented in
Fig. 6.9. The simulations were made using the small-signal, multilayer simulation model
described in Chapter 7 that was modified to provide the response for off-center points.
Both the “turn-on” and “turn-off” times clearly increase as the probe pulse is further
separated from the pump. The “dip” in the induced voltage for off-center points is the
manifestation of the “reverse” shielding we expect to see in the bottom layer of the
OCOG-2 device as described above. The presence of this dip in both the simulation and
data is particularly strong evidence that the model for multi-layer diffusive conduction is
a good description of the physical behavior of the device. As Fig. 6.10 reveals, this “dip”
occurs at least to some degree for most off-center points outside of the incident spot.
0 20 40 60 80 100-0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Curve
1
2
3
4
5
Control Spot
Probe Spot
5
4
3
2
1
Spot Separation
Data Simulation
5 �m 5 �m
10 �m 7.5 �m
15 �m 15 �m
17 �m 20 �m
20 �m 25 �m
Cha
nge
in V
olta
ge (
a.u.
)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.9: The measured (red) and simulated (black) device response for various separation distancesbetween the probe and control pulses. As the spot overlap diminishes, testing device response for off-axispoints, both the “turn-on” and “turn-off” slow.
122
-20 -10 0 10 200
5
10
15
20
25
Position (�m)
Tim
e (p
s)
0.19 -- 0.20 0.18 -- 0.19
0.17 -- 0.18 0.16 -- 0.17
0.15 -- 0.16 0.14 -- 0.15
0.13 -- 0.14 0.12 -- 0.13
0.11 -- 0.12 0.10 -- 0.11
0.09 -- 0.10 0.08 -- 0.09
0.07 -- 0.08 0.06 -- 0.07
0.05 -- 0.06 0.04 -- 0.05
0.03 -- 0.04 0.02 -- 0.03
0.01 -- 0.02 0 -- 0.01
-0.01 -- 0 -0.02 -- -0.01
-0.03 -- -0.02 -0.04 -- -0.03
-0.05 -- -0.04
Figure 6.10: Simulation of the spatial and temporal response of the bottom layer in an OCOG-2 device.The white central spot is the peak of the change in voltage greater than the normalized value of 0.2. Thepurple contours indicate where and when the reverse bias temporarily increases. Simulation parametersincluded a pulse length of 2 ps, a spot size of 5 �m, three resistive layers with R=[300; 300; 10] ��� andtwo capacitive layers with C=[0.3; 0.1] fF/�m2.
123
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35-0.005
0.000
0.005
0.010
0.015
0.020
0.025
0.030
0.035
0.040
Pulse Power
6.0 pJ
5.3 pJ
4.6 pJ
4.0 pJ
3.3 pJ
2.6 pJ
2.0 pJ
1.3 pJ
0.66 pJ
Abs
olut
e C
hang
e in
Ref
lect
ivity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.11: OCOG-2 response to large signal control inputs. Device tested with probe (signal) pulsepower of 12 �W, 5 �m spot size radius, and –5 and –15 V bias across the top and bottom diode,respectively.
6.2.3 Large signal experimental results and simulationsThe response of the OCOG-2 device to larger control pulse signals is presented in
Fig. 6.11. At low energies (e.g. 0.66 pJ), as the pulse energy rises the magnitude of the
reflectivity change increases in a correspondingly linear fashion. As the pulse energy
continues to increase, however, the p-i-n recovery response begins to deviate from the
hyperbolic form, the �/(�+t) component of Eq. (6.2), of purely diffusive conduction-based
decay. The magnitude of the change in reflectivity increases at a slower and slower rate
with respect to increasing power, flattening out at the peak, and decays progressively
more slowly. At even higher powers (e.g. ~5.0 pJ) the magnitude of the change in
reflectivity clearly reaches a limit. Decay is quite slow and has a completely different
functional form than diffusive conduction. Turn-on time is nearly constant with
increasing control power. Actually, we believe the p-i-n response at large signals was
sensitive to the very short absorption length of the pump pulse (due to the short
wavelength we used). If instead, for example, photogeneration was approximately evenly
124
distributed across the intrinsic region (e.g., by using a wavelength much closer to the
bandedge), we expect that the initial voltage shielding (turn-on) time would shrink with
increasing incident power.
The fit between the data and simulation in Figure 6.12 provides support for the
following hypothesis describing the large signal response. When large control energies
are used, the magnitude of the overall reverse bias (applied bias plus the “built-in”
voltage) becomes a critical factor. If there are enough electrons and holes, as they
separate the shielding electric field they create rapidly reduces the local electric field to
near zero. As a result, carriers in that low-field region slow down and may stop drifting.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
5.3, 5.5 pJ6.0, 5.8 pJ
4.0, 4.8 pJ
4.6, 5.2 pJ
1.3, 2.3 pJ0.66, 1.0 pJ
2.0, 3.1 pJ
2.6, 3.7 pJ
3.3, 4.4 pJ
Pulse Energy
Nor
mal
ized
Cha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity (
a.u.
)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.12: Normalized change in reflectivity as a function of time for various control pulse powers for aspot size radius of 5 �m with –5 V and –15 V reverse bias applied across the top and bottom diodes,respectively. Values of the actual (left column) and simulated (right column) incident power are presentedin the figure’s legend. Simulation parameters included resistances per square of 300, 300, and 10 ����forthe top n, p, and bottom n layers with top and bottom layer intrinsic regions of 0.3 and 0.1 fF/�m2.
Carriers at the edge of the shielded region still see a largely unscreened field and
continue to drift. As they move, the shielded space expands in their wake. The result is
still a rapid “turn-on” but followed by a much slower decay as many of the carriers
become trapped in the intrinsic region. Two ongoing processes help alleviate this
125
situation. One is regular carrier diffusion in the z direction. The other process is
diffusive conduction. Diffusive conduction constantly eats away at the screening voltage.
As it does so, the electric field in the intrinsic region grows, allowing carriers to continue
to drift. As the carriers move, however, they once again shield the field and the process
repeats itself. The carriers move slowly but, eventually, they are completely extracted
from the intrinsic region. After that point, any remaining voltage build-up decays away,
limited only by diffusive conduction. At sufficiently large control energies, the overall
voltage (and hence reflectivity) becomes proportional to the percentage of the intrinsic
region that is still fully shielded. In this regime it is the voltage decay, and not just the
“turn on” that is limited by how quickly the carriers can be extracted from the intrinsic
region.
The above description and explanation make physical sense and the simulations
exhibit qualitative behavior similar to the device response. However, with the larger
intensities, the simulations do not match the data well: at longer times the modeled
voltage build-up decays away too quickly while at short times (roughly between 3 – 10
ps) the “dip” in the initial build-up response is not reproduced. The most likely reason
these effects occur is due to the simplification of only modeling the response of the
device at the center of the incident light. The off-center, 0r � , response of diffusive
conduction is distinct, as described in Section 6.2.2. The off-center small-signal response
is presented in Fig. 6.9. How off-center behavior becomes important with large signals is
addressed below.
With large incident light intensities, the voltage change in the center quickly
“saturates” (the device is fully shielded). The voltage shielding at off-center points,
however, continues to rise until they, too, saturate. Due to this non-linearity, the initial
Gaussian shape of the voltage gradient distorts, flattening out with increasing intensities
for large signals. This reduces the voltage diffusion speed. Additionally, the probe pulse
has a finite spot size (equal to the spot size of the pump pulse), and so it samples on-
center as well as off-center points. As expressed in Eq. (6.2), the response of off-center
voltage decay slows with increasing radial distance. Taken together, when pump
intensities are high, the resulting reflectivity measurement shows a slower decay due to
its off-center behavior. Modeling these effects would require full three-dimensional
126
analysis instead of the simplified two one-dimensional equations used here
As the incident power increases, the time needed for the change in reflectivity to
crest grows (and a ‘dip’ in reflectivity also develops at short times). This, too, is due to
the sampling of off-center points by the probe beam. As the distance from the spot
center increases, the initial rise-time of the voltage shielding lengthens; it takes time for
the initial shielding voltage to diffuse, increasing the shielding at distant points. Thus,
off-center points take longer to reach their maximum voltage change and, because the
probe beam samples them as well, the overall change in reflectivity peaks at a later time.
6.3 THIRD GENERATION OCOG-3The OCOG-3 consisted of a top p-i-n diode and a bottom p-i(MQW)-n diode on
the top of a DBR stack centered at 850 nm. The topmost p and intrinsic layers were only
50 and 100 nm thick, respectively, including a GaAs capping layer. Except for the
bottom diode’s intrinsic region (60 QWs, each consisting of 120 Å GaAs wells and 40 Å
AlAs barriers) and the DBR mirror, all other layers were Al0.3Ga0.7As. To increase the
conductivity of the top p-layer, 660 nm of indium-tin-oxide (ITO) was deposited. This
layer also acted as an anti-reflection coating.ii Device processing produced square mesas
300 �m wide on a side with wire-bonds to each of the four conducting layers of the
double-diode structure. This allowed independent biasing of each diode.
ii The ITO we used was 75% absorbing instead of an expected 5-10%. We believe this was due toprocessing difficulties and not inherent to the device operation. Consequently, in this paper we discountthe ITO absorption in reflectivity and power calculations.
127
BraggMirror
p
300�m
1�m
i
pi
Signal
Control
0.��m
Quantum WellStack
Top “Control” Diode
Bottom “Modulator”Diode
n
n
ITO
Figure 6.13: Schematic of OCOG-3, a p-i-n-p-i(MQW)-n device.
6.3.1 Small signal experimental results and simulationThe OCOG-3 devices performed as expected, providing faster switching times
while providing the potential for greater device functionality compared to OCOG-1 and
OCOG-2 devices. The close fit between simulation and data lends strong support to the
multi-layer theory of diffusive conduction as an appropriate model for OCOG behavior.
The significantly faster gate operation, in spite of thicker QW barriers and, hence, longer
escape times for electrons and holes, demonstrates a significant advantage of having
separate regions responsible for the gating and the electroabsorption shift functionality
that is provided by a dual diode structure. For small signal simulations, the diffusive
conduction response was calculated by the method described in Chapter 4. Resistance
per square and capacitance per unit area were the provided parameters. The result was
then convolved with the control pulse length and the carrier drift behavior in the top
diode (modeled separately) to determine the overall reflectivity response of the device.
Finally, that result was convolved with the signal (probe) pulse length to determine the
output as seen by the photodetector. This approach is similar to the Green’s function
methodology used elsewhere[13, 14], and is described more fully in Chapter 7.
128
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Data
Simulation
Ref
lect
ivity
Cha
nge
(a.u
.)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.14: Small signal (70 fJ per pulse) response data and simulation of the optical gate with turn on-offtime with 2 ps control and signal pulses and spot size of 3.5 �m, demonstrating 13 ps full-width 10%maximum turn on-off time (horizontal, arrowed line).
Small signal (70 fJ switching energy) response of the device was tested using a
428 nm control pulse and an 857 nm signal pulse; the top diode was biased at –4.0 V and
the bottom diode biased at –2.7 V. The full-width 10% maximum turn on-off time was
13 ps for 2 ps pulses with a spot size of 3.5 �m. The theoretical simulations of the device
response are in good agreement with both sets of experimental data (i.e. both for
delta-function-like (very short) pulses and extended pulses in time), verifying the validity
of the multilayer diffusive conduction model. If the read-out pulse is deconvolved from
the results, the actual length of the time the gate is ‘on’ is just 10 ps.
6.3.2 Large signal experimental results and simulationLarge-signal device behavior is presented in Fig. 6.15. The spot size radius was
again 3.5 �m, while the switching energy was 1.5 pJ (39 fJ/�m2) using 2 ps pulses.
Excluding the parasitic absorption of the ITO (described above) and the top p-layer,
approximately a 2-to-1 contrast ratio was achieved with a change in absolute reflectivity
of about 30%. The optical gate opens and closes -- returns to 10% of maximum change --
FW10%M
129
within 20 ps; this time reduces to 17 ps when the read-out pulse is deconvolved from the
data.
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 300.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70A
bsol
ute
Ref
lect
ivity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.15: Large signal response of the optical gate with 2 ps control and signal pulses and spot size of3.5 �m, demonstrating 20 ps full-width 10% maximum (horizontal, arrowed line) turn on-off time with a30% reflectivity change
The slower response of large signals likely stems from photogenerated carriers
fully screening the reverse bias across the top diode before they reach the doped layers,
slowing vertical carrier transport. This hypothesis is reinforced by the data shown in
Fig. 6.16a. As the power of the control pulse rose, the normalized device response stayed
constant until a critical value (e.g. one sufficient to fully screen to top diode’s bias) was
reached. Beyond that limit, the turn-off time significantly increases. As the voltage
applied across the top was diode decreased, making it easier to be fully shielded, the
magnitude of this critical power also decreased as expected. Moreover, as Fig. 6.16b
shows, as the power increased, the turn-on time decreased, indicating that when more
carriers were created the carriers did not need to move as far to produce a given voltage
shift (and that this shift was limited by the top diode reverse bias).
FW10%M
130
0 10 20 30
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
225�W
400�W
600�W
2000�W
Nor
mal
ized
Ref
lect
ivity
Time (ps)
0 1 2 30.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
225�W
750�W
1350�W
2000�W
5000�W
Nor
mal
ized
Ref
lect
ivity
(a.u
.)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.16: Overall (6.16a, top) and initial (6.16b, bottom) OCOG-3 device response at a various input powersof a 100 fs, 5 �m radius pulse, with the top diode biased at –8.0V (top), and –1.0V (bottom).
131
1 2 3 4 5
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Increasing
Control Energy
Input Control Pulse Energy
'6.0pJ
'5.3pJ
'4.6pJ
'4.0pJ
'3.3pJ
'2.6pJ
'2.0pJ
'1.3pJ
'0.66pJ
Nor
mal
ized
Cha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity
Time (ps)
Figure 6.17: “Turn-on” of OCOG-2 device response for various input powers of a 100 fs, 5 �m radiuspulse.
It is interesting to compare the qualitatively different turn-on responses of
OCOG-2 and OCOG-3 (Figs. 6.16b and 6.17). Although the turn-on time was reduced in
both devices as the input power increased, the improved faster response was much more
pronounced in the OCOG-3 device. This difference is likely due to the difference in the
thickness of the intrinsic region, 0.3 �m in OCOG-2 and 0.1 �m in OCOG-3, combined
with the very short absorption length, ~50 nm, of the control pulse light in both devices.
In the OCOG-2 device, most of the light is absorbed near one side of the device. Thus,
because the turn-on time will still be limited by the need for the carriers to travel across
the length of the intrinsic region, the turn-on time is only slightly dependent on the input
intensity. For OCOG-3 structures, however, the much thinner intrinsic region means that,
relatively, a significantly larger proportion of the intrinsic region directly absorbs
photogenerated carriers; to zeroeth order the photogenerated carriers are constant across
the device. In this case, a slight separation of the photogenerated holes and electrons will
fully shield the entire intrinsic region without needing to travel far at all.
132
6.3.3 Multiple pulse (small signal) experimental results and simulationFigure 6.18 shows the device’s response to four control pulses, each separated by
20 ps. Simulation results matched well, with the discrepancy likely due to imperfect
generation of matching pulse energies.iii This key result -- the ability of the device to
recover in a short time limited only by the fast diffusive conduction response, not the
external RC time constants -- is clearly evident. There was a slight increase in the base
reflectivity level for the later pulses due to the build-up of the decay of the previous
pulses. Simulations showed that this build-up of base reflectivity (critical if the device is
to be used as a modulator at these rates) leveled off to a manageable level not far from
what is already seen here.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
Data
Simulation
Ref
lect
ivity
Cha
nge
(a.u
.)
Time (ps)
Figure 6.18: Multiple-pulse, small-signal response of the optical gate with 20 ps pulse separation.
iii The beam splitter/retroreflector subsystem generated equal intensity pulses, but with varyingpolarizations. Although OCOG devices are largely polarization insensitive, the optical set-up usedpolarization-sensitive optical components. Hence, the energy of the pulses downstream from thesubsystem were attenuated to various degrees.
133
REFERENCES
1. Barry, D.M., C.M. Snowden, and M.J. Howes, A Numerical Simulation of HighSpeed GaAs Photodetectors in IEE Colloquium on Microwave Devices,Fundamentals and Applications (1988).
2. Schneider, H. and K.v. Klitzing, "Thermionic emission and gaussian transport ofholes in a GaAs/AlxGa1-xAs multiple-quantum-well structure," Phys. Rev. B, vol.38, pp. 6160-6165 (1988).
3. Larsson, A., et al., "Tunable Superlattice p-i-n Photodetectors: Characteristics,Theory, and Applications," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 24, pp. 787-801 (1988).
4. Fox, A.M., et al., "Quantum Well Carrier Sweep Out: Relation toElectroabsorption and Exciton Saturation," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 27, pp.2281-2295 (1991).
5. Capasso, F., K. Mohammed, and A.Y. Cho, "Resonant Tunneling ThroughDouble Barriers, Perpendicular Quantum Transport Phenomena in Superlattices,and Their Device Applications," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 22, pp. 1853-1868(1986).
6. Faist, J., et al., "Quantum Cascade Laser," Science, vol. 264, pp. 553-566 (1994).
7. Faist, J., et al., "Vertical transition quantum cascade laser with Bragg confinedexcited state," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 66, pp. 538-540 (1995).
8. Goossen, K.W., "Excitonic electroabsorption in extremely shallow quantumwells," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 57, pp. 2582-2584 (1990).
9. Feldmann, J., et al., "Fast escape of photocreated carriers out of shallow quantumwells," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 59, pp. 66-68 (1991).
10. Yang, C.-M., et al., "Measurement of Effective Drift Velocities of Electrons andHoles in Shallow Multiple-Quantum-Well p-i-n Modulators," IEEE J. Quant.Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1498-1506 (1997).
11. Ricco, B. and M.Y. Azbel, "Physics of resonant tunneling. The one-dimensionaldouble-barrier case," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 29, pp. 1970-1981 (1984).
12. Macleod, H.A., Thin-Film Optical Filters. 2 ed (McGraw-Hill, New York, 1989).
13. Liu, H., High speed, low driving voltage vertical cavity MQW modulators foroptical interconnect and communication, in Electrical Engineering, (StanfordUniversity, Stanford, 2001).
14. Wang, H., et al., "Ultrafast Cross-Well carrier Transport in a Strained Multiple-Quantum-Well InGaAs-GaAs p-i-n Modulator," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 33, pp.192-197 (1997).
134
Chapter VII: Simulation Methods
The models used for the simulations that have been presented are described
below. Two general approaches were taken: a time-sequential finite difference model
was used when individual charge dynamics were of particular importance while a
Green’s function method was taken advantage of for small-signal simulations where the
different dynamic components of the switching behavior could be modeled independently
of each other. Both approaches allowed fast computation of simulation results.
7.1 INTRODUCTION
Carrier dynamics may be described by a combination of Poisson’s equation,
� �a dq n p N N�
�� �� � � � �� �
E (7.1)
where n, p, Na, and Nd are the free electron, free hole, fixed negative charge, and fixed
positive charge densities, respectively where each is a function of ( , )r t� , and the
continuity equations,
n nn G Rt
�� � ���
�nj p p
p G Rt
�� � �� �
�pj (7.2)
in which Gn is the generation/escape rate, Rn is the recombination/trapping rate, and nj is
the current density, for electrons; there are equivalent definitions for holes. In order to
describe the behavior of a particular device, a judicious choice in determining how to
express the functions in these equations and in how to solve them can provide a model
that is accurate yet requires only a short computation time. For OCOGs or similar p-i-n
devices, certain details, such as the use of small spot sizes compared to the area of the
device face and short pulses of light, enable many simplifications to be made. Three
different models of OCOG behavior were used to simulate device responses shown in
Chapter 6. The model used for OCOG-1 combined a time-iterative method to calculate
the vertical motion while using boundary conditions for the overall voltage between the
doped layers that were determined by diffusive conduction. From this format the two
other simulation methods branched, both of which made use of diffusive conduction
135
response functions for multi-layered devices. In one method, a detailed finite difference
approach was used to model the large-signal response of OCOG-2. The other method
was based on convolving the various impulse response functions of the device (a
small-signal model), particularly efficient for quickly modeling multi-pulse behavior, as
was done for OCOG-3s.
7.2 OCOG-1: CHARGE TRANSPORT MODELING IN
P-I(MQW)-N DEVICES
It turns out that for OCOG-1 devices we were able to make several simplifications
that allowed us to dramatically reduce what could be a very complicated, coupled
three-dimensional calculation. Carrier motion in the intrinsic region could be
approximated by looking at only vertical (z) motion while carrier behavior in the doped
layers was governed by (lateral) voltage diffusion that was also expressible in a
one-dimensional form. The reflectivity of the device as a function of time was modeled
by combining a time-iterative program, which determined at each step the electric field in
the intrinsic region along the z-axis (at the center of the incident control spot), with an
experimentally measured dependence of the absorption as a function of electric field. We
describe these models in detail below
7.2.1 Governing equationsIn a p-i-n diode without multiple quantum wells, all the carriers are free to move
and the electron and hole current densities of Eq. (7.2) can be expressed with (three
dimensional) drift-diffusion equations, Eq (4.2):i
n nq n qD n�� �nj E ∇ p pq p qD p�� �pj E ∇ (7.3)
where � and D are the appropriate mobility and carrier diffusion coefficients either for
electrons or holes.
When quantum wells are present, however, transport in the intrinsic region is
more complicated. Before a population of photogenerated carriers in a particular
i Refer to Chapter 4 for a description of when the drift-diffusion equation is an appropriate description ofcarrier transport.
136
quantum well can move, they must first escape from the quantum well by tunneling,
thermionic emission, or field-assisted escape. [1-4] Tunneling and thermionic emission
times for single quantum wells can be reasonably approximated based on Eq. (7-9) of
Ref. [4]. For the 100 Å GaAs wells and 5 Å AlAs barriers of OCOG-1, the calculations
indicate that tunneling (on the order of picoseconds) should be significantly faster for
both electrons and holes compared to thermionic emission (greater than a nanosecond).
However, the close spacing of the quantum wells suggests that tunneling actually
involves several quantum wells, and their combination might alter (reduce) the likelihood
of tunneling.[5] To account for such an effect we used a tunneling-resonance program
based on the specific QW structure of the device.[6] This simulation provided the energy
resonance widths (for a particular electric field) of the lower electron and hole levels.
These widths may be converted in lifetimes, or in this case escape times, using the
Heisenberg uncertainly principle: /tun FWHME� � �� (See Appendix C for more details).[7]
The results showed that though the effective tunneling times increase (~2 ps for electrons
and ~20 ps for holes with zero electric field), they are still much less than for thermionic
emission. Thus, the overall characteristic escape time for carriers (n for electrons, p for
holes) may be expressed as , ,n p n pescape tun� �� ; the trapped population of a QW decays as
,exp( / )n pescapet �� .
At the same time, free carriers have a chance of being recaptured by a quantum
well. The likelihood of this exponential process has a time constant of ,n ptrapping� . Carriers
trapped in this manner, however, may be more energetic than the initially photogenerated
carriers and can reside much closer to the top of the quantum well, particularly in deep
wells. Escape of these recaptured carriers, consequently, can be modeled by a separate
characteristic escape time, ,n pre escape��
. In our simulations, due to the ultra-thin but high
barriers we estimated that ,n ptrapping� =0.5 ps for both electrons and holes [3] but that
subsequent re-emission was even faster due to the higher energy levels into which the
carriers may be recaptured (as indirectly shown in Ref. [8]). Therefore, we did not model
the trapping and re-escape effects. The escape process -- and subsequent trapping and
re-emission processes had they been explicitly modeled -- were included as part of the
137
functions Gn and Rn of Eq. (7.2) for electrons (and in the similar functions for holes),
shown in Eqs. (7.14) and (7.15) below.
Carriers that have escaped are free to move due to drift and diffusion, Eq. (7.3).
This motion is primarily vertical since the voltage bias is along the z axis. We assumed
that, for the pulse energies we would use, the electric fields along the z axis in the
intrinsic region would remain large enough to ensure that motion due to drift was much
larger than that due to regular carrier diffusion. Regular carrier diffusion was therefore
not modeled.[9, 10]
Any voltage shielding which builds up due to this photogenerated carrier
separation smoothes itself out laterally across the device face as a result of diffusive
conduction described by Eqs. (7.4) and (7.5).[11] This voltage diffusion may be
equivalently described as “effective” lateral motion of the free carriers in the doped
layers. ii
2x yvoltage
diffusion
dV D Vdt
��
� (7.4)
V is the voltage due to shielding across the intrinsic region and
1voltagediffusion sq area
DR C
� (7.5)
where Rsq is the sum of the resistance per square of the p and n layers and the capacitance
per unit area is determined by the thickness of the intrinsic layer.
When the incident spot of light is small compared to the area of the device face,
voltage relaxation may occur on a picosecond time scale and is essentially independent of
the RC time constant of the external circuitry.iii If such an instantaneous surface-normal
light pulse is spatially Gaussian, V(r, t=0) is then given by:
� �2
20
, 0 exp/ 2M
rV r t Vw
� ��� � � �
� �(7.6)
where
ii Eqs. (3.1)-(3.5) have been reproduced here in Eqs. (7.4)-(7.7).iii The small overall voltage that builds-up across the entire device face does indeed relax through theexternal circuitry. For single pulse behavior this response may be ignored; when modeling manyconsecutive pulses or extended periods of time, this external relaxation should also be included.
138
20
2
TOTM
A
QVwC �
�� �� �� �
(7.7)
Here QTOT is the total photogenerated charge and w0 is the spot size radius. An analytic
solution to Eq. (7.4) is then given by:
� �� �
2
, exp4impulse M
response
rV r t Vt D t�
� �
� ��� �� � �� � � �� �� �
(7.8)
with2
0 142 voltage
diffusion
wD
�
� �� � �� �
(7.9)
The effective lateral carrier motion in the doped layers due to voltage diffusion is thus
several orders of magnitude faster than the lateral motion of carriers in the intrinsic
region which is primarily due to regular (ambipolar) carrier diffusion; voltagediffusion
D >> Dambipolar.
In many devices the thickness of the intrinsic layer is less than or equal to one or
two microns while the spot size of the incident light is several microns in diameter. As a
result, the relative time for photogenerated carriers of a pulse of light to escape and
vertically separate to the doped layers -- a few tens of picoseconds, and often much less --
before any significant (regular) lateral diffusion of the carriers in the intrinsic region
occurs. A simplifying assumption was therefore made: lateral carrier motion inside the
intrinsic region could be disregarded. Taking these ideas together, the device response
could be modeled by restricting carrier motion to be only along the z-axis except within
the doped regions where lateral voltage diffusion is also important.
To further simplify the calculations (particularly those related to diffusive
conduction), only the voltage at the center of the incident spot was modeled. The charge
density was determined by assuming that the incident power was evenly distributed
across an effective incident spot area of �w02/2. Also, the probe beam sampled
off-center voltages. This resulted in an indirect measurement of the voltage that was
smaller than the actual change at spot center. The correction factor was determined by
139
� �( , ) ( , ) 12( , )
pump probe
probe
V r V r r drd
V r r drd
� � �
� ��
��
(7.10)
As will be later described, this spot-center model may misjudge the device recovery time
of large signal inputs.
The thickness of the intrinsic region typically is significantly smaller than the spot
size width. Consequently, the charge density at the spot center may be approximated as
in an ideal parallel plate capacitor (no fringing field) so that the electric field due to the
charge density at a particular vertical location has constant magnitude between the doped
layers although its direction flips at the charge location. This is what allows the use of
the integral on the right-hand side of Eq. (7.11) below, significantly simplifying
Poisson’s equation.
A few other assumptions are also made:
∙ the incident pump and probe pulses have a Gaussian spot intensity distribution
∙ drift-diffusion equations are valid (e.g., we may ignore ballistic effects, temperature
gradients, etc.)
∙ recombination may be ignored (recombination times are typically on the order of
nanoseconds while the response of the devices considered here were 100 ps or less)
∙ the mobility of the carriers was kept independent of the electric field and carrier
density. We have adopted this commonly used assumption although it is not very
accurate [12-14]
Carrier motion within the device can thus be described using just the following few
equations. In the intrinsic region:
� �
( , )
( , ) ( , )
built in applied
bottom
top
E z t E E
q n z t p z t dz�
�
� �
�� �� �� ��
�(7.11)
bottom and top refer to the bottom and top of the p-i-n deviceiv while n and p are the
non-steady state carrier densities. iv When used for multilayered devices such as OCOG-2, bottom and top refer to the bottom and top or thetopmost p-i-n layers
140
( , ) ( , )n n z nn z t G R j z t
t�
� � ���
( , ) ( , )p p z pp z t G R j z t
t�
� � ���
(7.12)
( , ) ( , ) ( , )n nj z t q n z t E z t�� ( , ) ( , ) ( , )p pj z t q p z t E z t�� (7.13)
1 1n initial recapturedinitial recaptured
n n
G g n n� �
� � � �� � �� � � �
� � � �(7.14)
1n trapping
n
R n�
� �� � �
� �(7.15)
In Eq. (7.14), g is the photogenerated carrier pair generation rate.
In the doped layers:
0
( 0, ) ( ') ( 0, ') 't
overall m impulseresponse
V r t V t V r t t dt� �� � � �� �
� �� (7.16)
where Voverall(r=0, t) is the overall voltage shielding at spot center and impulseresponse
V is the
voltage diffusion impulse response function for the p-i-n photodetector portion of the
device. Due to these simplifications, the simulation time (on the order of a minute) is
short compared to a complete coupled 3D model.
7.2.2 Simulation implementationNext, we describe how this reduced set of equations, Eqs. (7.11-7.16), was used in
a computer program to model the response of an OCOG-1 device to a pulse of light. The
core of the simulation calculated the voltage across the device, at spot center, as a
function of time ( )V t . That information, combined with the location of charge carriers in
the intrinsic region, enabled the electric field as a function of z to be determined. Finally,
the reflectivity of the device was calculated using empirical data of the absorption as a
function of electric field. More specifically, a time-iterative model was used to simulate
the dynamic behavior of the OCOG device, as shown schematically in Fig. 7.1. After
determining the generating function of the photogenerated carriers and electric fields, the
141
primary loop of the simulation was initiated whose internal structure consisted of the
following sections:
∙ determining the new carrier distribution as a function of vertical (z) position; newly
generated, freed, and trapped carriers were included in this step
∙ determining the electric field as a function of z due to space charges
∙ determining the resulting overall voltage, incorporating lateral voltage diffusion
∙ determining the total electric field as a function of z
∙ determining the absorption as a function of z
At the end of each loop period the reflectivity of the device was calculated. Each of these
sections is described in detail below.
Initial carrier distributionand electric fields
New carrier positions
New electric fields (z)
Voltage diffusion
Reflectivity (t)
Adjustment for final electric fields (z)
Figure 7.1: Schematic flow-chart of time-iterative large-signal computer simulation
7.2.2.1 Generating Function
The time and spatial dependence of the generating function, g, of Eq. (7.14) was
determined based on the particular experimental setup we used. The absorption length of
the incident 850 nm light near the heavy hole absorption peak of the 100 Å wide GaAs
QWs is about 1 �m. Given the intensity and duration of the control pulse, at each time
step the number of new photogenerated carrier pairs as a function of vertical position of
the QWs in the intrinsic region can be calculated. In determining the magnitude of the
incident light in the intrinsic region, it is assumed that there was no absorption in the
142
doped Al0.33Ga0.67As layers and the QW barriers, that there is no top reflection from the
antireflection coating, and that the reflectivity of the underlying DBR mirror is 100%.
7.2.2.2 Carrier Distribution
At each time period, after accounting for newly photogenerated carriers for each
QW, the number of carriers escaping for the first time and number escaping that had
already been recaptured were determined based on Eq. (7.14) and added to the free
carriers present at that location. Similarly, the number of free carriers at a point that were
recaptured by a QW was also computed using Eq. (7.15), reducing the number of free
carriers. A summary of the values used are presented in Table 7.1. As mentioned, the
small time needed for a recaptured carrier to escape resulted in little difference in the
modeled behavior of an OCOG-1 between simulations which included the trapping and
re-emission of carriers and those which did not. However, the initial escape (tunneling)
time constants, escapen� and escape
p� , were critical to device performance. For the quantum
wells in our device, the large mass of holes kept escapep� relatively constant as a function of
electric field; on the other hand, escapen� was quite sensitive. For small signals the electric
field is relatively constant, but as the control pulse intensity rises the electric field across
the wells and barriers shrinks, increasing escapen� .[2, 15] We did not model the electric
field dependence of the escape time. Instead, as a rough approximation, we used escapen�
as an “effective” electron escape time, making it a fitting parameter for larger-signal data.
143
Table 7.1: OCOG-1 Key Simulation Parameters
Parameter ValueIntrinsic region thickness 1 �m
Number of quantum wells 94
Capacitance per unit area, C A 0.11 fF/�m2
Resistance per square, Rsq 2500 ����v
Applied bias voltage varied
Pulse energy varied
Pulse wavelength varied
Spot size radius 7 �m
Max. drift velocity, electron, maxnv 1.5 107 cm/s
Max. drift velocity, hole, maxpv 0.6 107 cm/s
Initial escape time, electron, escapen� varied
Initial escape time, hole, escapep� 20 ps
Once the number of free carriers was determined, they were subject to drift due to
the local electric field. Carrier mobility and drift over MQWs and superlattices has been
studied (for example, Refs. [16-18]), though it is difficult to deconvolute the results from
other MQW effects such as trapping. Moreover, intervalley scattering becomes
important when the Al concentration of the barriers is greater than ~0.4 (becoming an
indirect bandgap material), complicating the picture. For OCOG-1s, carrier velocity was
very roughly approximated by multiplying the maximum drift velocity, max,n pv , by a
field-dependent term, ,( )n pE� , close to what would be expected in bulk GaAs.vi For
electrons,
� �
[ / ] [ / ]
1
[ / ] [ / ]
[ / ]
2.5 0.0 0.4
( ) 0.3 0.7 1 0.4 0.4 1.0
0.5 1.0
V m V m
n V m V m
V m
E E
E E E
E
� �
� �
�
�
�
� �� �� �� �
� � � � � �� � �
�� � �
(7.17)
v 4-pt probe measurements were only available for the top (p) layer and indicated 470 ���. The idealexpected resistance of the n layer was expected to be on the order of 10 ���, for a total (p layer + n layer)resistance per square of roughly 480 ���. However, the n layer consisted of several AlAs regions in theDBR that could potentially result in defects, significantly reducing the mobility. A value of 2000 ��� forthe n layer was used in the simulation to fit the data.
144
while for holes,
[ / ] [ / ]
[ / ]
0.125 0 0.8( )
1.0 0.8V m V m
pV m
E EE
E� �
�
�
� �� �� �� � �
�� �� (7.18)
The drift velocity of free carriers determined how far they moved over the course of a
time interval, thereby redistributing them. Care was taken to ensure that the carriers
stopped their vertical movement at the edges of the intrinsic region (the doped layers).
7.2.2.3 Electric Field (z)
Having modeled the vertical motion of the carriers, the electric field as a function
of z in the intrinsic region due to space charge effects was calculated next. The thickness
of the intrinsic region typically is significantly smaller than the spot size width.
Consequently, the charge density at the spot center may be approximated as in an ideal
(infinitely extended) parallel plate capacitor so that the electric field due to the charge
density at a particular vertical location has constant magnitude between the doped layers,
though its direction flips at the charge location. This is what allows the use of the
integral on the right-hand side of Eq. (7.10), significantly simplifying Poisson’s equation.
At each vertical location in the center of the spot, summing the electric fields from the
charge densities along the z-axis determines the total field at that point due to the space
charge. When combined with the built-in and applied fields, this process provides a good
approximation of the solution to Poisson’s equation.
7.2.2.4 Overall voltage changes due to voltage diffusion
At this point, vertical motion and field calculations have been accounted for. To
account for lateral voltage decay and thus lateral carrier motion, at each time period the
overall change in voltage at spot center due to vertical carrier motion at each time period
was recorded. The remaining voltage change from a particular previous time step equals
its original magnitude multiplied by the diffusive conduction impulse response,
impulseresponse
V (r=0,t) given by Eq. (7.8), as a function of the time that elapsed between that
vi A better fit is later used for OCOG-2 and OCOG-3.
145
specific time step and the current moment. The overall voltage at a particular time
period, Voverall, can be calculated by summing the remaining voltage change of each
previous time step and adding it to the constant built-in and applied biases (a discrete
form of Eq. (7.16)).vii
7.2.2.5 Total Electric field
The electric field as a function of z was determined next. The difference between
the overall voltage and the voltage due to the space charge in the intrinsic region is due to
the carrier density in the doped layers. These carriers in the doped layers are not
explicitly handled – their presence is implicitly assumed and modeled via voltage
diffusion. Nevertheless, they provide a constant electric field across the intrinsic region
that balances the left- and right-hand sides of Eq. (7.19) below.
, &overall carriers space charge, biasdoped layers intrinsic layer built in
V V V V�
� � � (7.19)
The total electric field as a function of z is thus the sum of the electric field due to these
carrier densities in the doped layers, added to that of space-charges and the bias fields.
7.2.2.6 Absorption
The simulation determined the absorption, �(z), by using a measured empirical
relation between the reflectivity and the voltage applied across the device. The effective
absorption coefficient’s dependence on electric field was determined by measuring the
reflectivity, R, of the signal pulse as a function of voltage. In doing so, we used the
simplifying assumptions that the sum of the absorption and the reflectivity summed to
unity (i.e. disregarding the small amount of light transmitted through the DBR stack) and
that the signal absorption occurred only in the MQW region. Thus,
vii In these calculations we assume that the capacitance per unit area between the doped layers is constant.This is, however, only an approximation. As the photogenerated carriers separate and move towards the nand p regions, they may build-up at the edges and accumulate inside the intrinsic region, increasing theeffective CA. This is particularly significant at large intensities and strong shielding when much of theintrinsic region may actually be filled with a high density of charged carriers. In such circumstances, thevoltage diffusion coefficient changes (shrinks). The voltage diffusion impulse response function, therefore,becomes dependent on the configuration of the charges which change over time. This may be handled in astraight-forward manner with a simple p-i-n structure but becomes significantly more complicated as thenumber of layers in the device increases. Ultimately, a full 3-D finite difference approach would need to beimplemented instead.
146
� �� �LVRV
2ln�
�� (7.20)
where L is the thickness of the bottom intrinsic (MQW) region.
7.2.2.7 Reflectivity
Finally, the reflectivity of the device was determined by determining how much
of an incoming pulse would be absorbed as it passed through the MQW region, bounced
off the DBR mirror, and once again passed through the MQW:
� �0 exp 2 ( )bottom
reflectedz top
I I z z�
�
� � �� (7.21)
7.3 LARGE-SIGNAL MODEL: OCOG-2Modeling the response of OCOG-2 devices was simpler than modeling OCOG-1
devices in some respects; the OCOG-2 device operation did not depend on carrier escape
time from, and transport across, quantum wells since the control (top) diode made use of
a bulk intrinsic region rather that MQWs. Equations (7.14) and (7.15) simplified to just
nG g� and 0nR � (7.22)
The resulting behavior is similar to that of a p-i-n photodetector. The finite difference
model used to simulate the large-signal described below is similar in concept to the
related methods that have been used to model large signal photodetector dynamics.[12,
13, 19, 20] An interesting alternative based on the use of matrices, a ‘state space’ model,
has also been reported.[10]
Vertical motion of the carriers is due to drift and diffusion. For large-signal
response, regular carrier diffusion along the z-axis cannot be ignored. Although such
diffusion effects are small when the carriers are moving at saturated drift velocities, large
pulse intensities result in strong shielding that can significantly reduce the drift
component of vertical motion. As a result, the vertical carrier diffusion becomes an
important factor in carrier dynamics. Electron current density of Eq. (7.12) is therefore
expressed as:
n nq n qD n�� �nj E ∇ (7.23)
The overall simulation model was similar to that used for OCOG-1. One
147
significant difference was that because regular carrier diffusion along the z-axis was not
ignored, the carrier densities in the doped layers whose magnitudes were controlled by
voltage diffusion, had to be explicitly included in the model. The vertical diffusion of
these carriers plays an important role in large-signal behavior. Another difference was
the use of a multilayered structure; there was strong voltage coupling between the control
and modular to structures. These and other changes are described in detail below as the
different sections of the simulation are presented.
7.3.1 Generating FunctionThe time and spatial dependence of the generating function, g, of Eq. (7.22) was
determined based on the particular experimental setup we used. The absorption length of
the incident 427 nm light in Al0.08Ga0.92As is short, about 33 nm.[21] The control signal,
as a consequence, was absorbed primarily in the top n-doped layer and the top of the
intrinsic layer beneath it. Given the duration of the control pulse, at each time step the
number of new photogenerated carriers as a function of vertical position in these top two
layers may be calculated.
It was important to account for the injection of photogenerated carriers from the
thin (50 nm) top n-doped layer into the intrinsic region. In our simulations this was
modeled by assuming that injection was due to thermionic emission.[22] The expression
for thermionic emission in a homojunction (appropriate for the OCOG device used here)
is rather simple since there is no barrier to prevent carrier motion. By assuming that the
relatively small number of photogenerated carriers created in the intrinsic region may be
ignored compared to the number created in the top n-layer due to the large absorption
coefficient, the thermionic current density is just
photogenththermionic nqvJ � (7.24)
where q is unit charge, nphotogen is the photogenerated carrier density, and the expected
thermal velocity in one direction (across the doped/intrinsic boundary) is given by
Cth qN
ATv2
� (7.25)
148
A is Richardson’s constant, T is temperature, and NC is the density of states. We can thus
write the impulse response of an instantaneous pulse that creates 0photogenn carriers.
� �0 expphotogen th thdn n v v tdt
� � (7.26)
in which �th=0.6x106 cm/s in our simulation. We use Eq. (7.26) to determine how many
photogenerated carriers initially enter the intrinsic region in the first “bin” near the
n-layer. From this point the carriers become subject to drift and diffusion, Eq. (7.23), as
described in the Carrier Distribution section below. The electrons tend to quickly move
back into the doped n layer while the holes cross the entire intrinsic region.
7.3.2 Carrier DistributionIn order to determine the new carrier distribution compared to the previous time
step, the numbers of photogenerated carriers present in the doped layers (excluding the
initial electron-hole pairs) were determined first. The voltage across the intrinsic region
due to carriers in the doped layers, ,carriersdoped layers
V was determined using Eq. (7.27). The
carrier number is proportional to ,carriersdoped layers
V divided by the capacitance of the intrinsic
region, Eq. (7.28).
,overall carriers space charge,doped layers intrinsic layer
V V V� � (7.27)
,doped layers carriersdoped layers
Q C V� (7.28)
Interestingly, it is possible to require “negative” carrier density in the doped
layers (i.e., a local reduction) if particular circumstances arise. For example, if
photogenerated charge carriers were to separate from, say, the center of the intrinsic
region until they are halfway to the doped layers (Fig. 7.2), there is a change in voltage
across the entire intrinsic region. If these carriers then stop moving, the field between
them due to their separation continues to affect the overall voltage between the doped n
and p layers. This change in voltage between the doped layers, however, diffuses
laterally away until the initial overall voltage is restored in spite of the ongoing shielding
due to the photogenerated carriers that we have kept fixed in the intrinsic region.
149
n pE(z,t=0)
n pE(z,t=t1)
Voverall=V0
Voverall=V0-�V
n pE(z,t=t2) Voverall=V0
free electrons due to doping
electrons and holesdue to photogeneration
free holes due to doping
Figure 7.2: Conceptual illustration of the behavior of a p-i-n device at a particular lateral (x,y) point inwhich voltage diffusion occurs results in the overall voltage between the doped layers recovering from thechange in voltage due to the separation of photogenerated carriers before those carriers have been swept outof the intrinsic region. The density of free carriers in the doped layers is reduced at that (x,y) point due tolateral voltage diffusion, creating an effect similar to image charges, until the photogenerated carriersthemselves actually reach the doped regions.
In this process, the final resulting number of carriers in the doped regions at this
vertical location is less than their starting values since some have laterally diffused away.
This “negative” carrier density compared to the steady-state situation balances the
shielding between the separated photogenerated carriers still in the intrinsic region so that
the overall voltage is the same as its initial value. What has occurred is that the free
carriers that result from doping the n and p layers have moved laterally away, behaving
analogously to a conductor with an image charge.
In our simulations, however, the free carriers due to dopants were not explicitly
modeled. As a result, when such “negative” carrier densities arose, the overall voltage
was properly accounted for, but the actual “excess” (photogenerated) carrier density in
the doped layers-- important for vertical diffusion calculations -- was assumed to be
simply zero.
It was also assumed that there was no vertical field inside the doped regions and,
therefore, these carriers did not experience drift; they did, however, diffuse. Vertical
diffusion within the doped regions was not explicitly modeled. Instead, it was assumed
that these electrons immediately equalized their distribution across the top n-layer
150
because it was so thin. In the p-layer, holes were arbitrarily assumed to immediately
evenly diffuse throughout the first 100 nm but then stop moving, even though that layer
was significantly thicker (1 �m). These assumptions determined the density of
photogenerated carriers at the edges of the intrinsic region. This information was
important for the later calculations of vertical diffusion of carriers into or out of the
doped layers. The relatively slow rate of hole transport to the p-region (unlike the rapid
electron transport due to the near negligible distance electrons had to move to reach the
n-layer) and the relatively fast voltage diffusion minimized the importance of the hole
concentration at the intrinsic/p-layer boundary. The arbitrary choice of 100 nm instant
diffusion was therefore not a critical detail. While inexact, these assumptions simplified
the modeling. More accurate models would explicitly include diffusion calculations
within the doped layers.
Next, carrier motion in the intrinsic region was determined with Eqs. (7.12),
(7.22), and (7.23). The drift velocity’s field-dependence for both carrier types was
modeled based on [23, 24].
( ) 1 expsathole hole sat
hole
Ev E vE
� �� �� � �� �� �� �
� �� �(7.29)
4
4( )
1
sate elec peak
elecelec
peakelec
EE vE
v EE
E
�� �
� � �� ��
� �� � �� �
(7.30)
using satholev =0.7x107 cm/s, sat
holeE =2x104 V/cm, satelecv =1.1x107 cm/s, and peak
elecE =4x105 V/cm.
To determine the new positions of the carriers for a particular time step, n(z,t) and
p(z,t), a finite difference method approach was used to solve the vertical drift-diffusion
equations for the electrons and holes based on the Crank-Nicholson method. For
numerical stability of the simulation, a 50-50 average between explicit and implicit
151
FTCM (forward time-centered space) functions[25] was used with 10 fs time steps and
10 nm vertical spatial steps.viii
7.3.3 Overall voltage changes due to voltage diffusionAt this point, vertical motion and field calculations have been accounted for; the
lateral voltage decay and thus lateral carrier motion has not. To do so, Eq. (7.16) is used.
At each time period the overall change in voltage at spot center due to vertical carrier
motion at each time period, Vm(t), is recorded. The impulse response of the top n-i-p
layers was coupled with the behavior of the lower p-i(MQW)–n layers, precluding the use
of Eq. (7.8) for a simple p-i-n device as an expression for impulseresponse
V (r=0,t).ix Instead, the
top and bottom layers’ diffusive conduction impulse response functions,top
impulseresponse
V and bottomimpulseresponse
V , were calculated by solving the coupled multilayer diffusion equations
as outlined in Chapter 4.x Thus, the overall voltage for a particular layer, Voverall, for a
specific time period can be calculated by summing the remaining voltage change (using
the correct impulse response function for that layer) of each previous time step and
adding it to the constant built-in and applied biases (a discrete form of Eq. (7.16)).
In these calculations we simply assume that the capacitance per unit area CA
between the doped layers is constant. As the photogenerated carriers separate and move
towards the n and p regions, however, they may build-up at the edges and accumulate
inside the intrinsic region. This is particularly significant at large intensities and strong
shielding because much of the intrinsic region may actually be filled with a high density
of charged carriers. In such circumstances, the width of the intrinsic region shrinks, the
effective CA rises, and the voltage diffusion coefficient changes (decreases). The voltage
diffusion impulse response function, therefore, becomes dependent on the configuration viii The stability condition of the finite difference method is given by 1
v tz�
��
.[25] To avoid instability for
the parameters and step size we used electron vertical diffusion coefficients with values < 50 cm2/s wererequired. Although the electron diffusion coefficient is approximately 175 cm2/s, to ensure stability a valueof only 40 cm2/s was used.ix This coupling behavior is what is responsible for the induced voltage across the bottom diode. Theresponse of the top diode does not differ significantly from its isolated behavior except that the voltageshielding buildup magnitude is reduced (as if placed across a voltage divider).
152
of the charges, which changes over time. This may be modeled in a straightforward
manner for a simple p-i-n structure but becomes significantly more complicated as the
number of layers in the device increases. Ultimately a full 3-D finite difference approach
would need to be implemented instead.
7.3.4 Total electric fieldThe electric field as a function of z was determined in a manner similar to that for
OCOG-1 devices. For both top and bottom intrinsic layers, Eq. (7.19) holds sway, and
the total electric field as a function of z can be determined as before. Actually,
determining the voltage across any intrinsic layer except the top-most one is particularly
simple. Because no photogenerated carriers are present in these layers, no carrier motion
needs to be modeled nor are there any space-charge effects. The voltages present are
those due only to the voltage changes in the top diode and their resulting dynamic
coupling with the other layers as expressed by the impulse response functions.
Therefore, the electric fields in these layers are constant: the overall voltage across them
divided by the width of the intrinsic layer.
7.3.5 Absorption and reflectivityAbsorption, �(z), and reflectivity are calculated in the same manner as that for
OCOG-1 devices.
7.4 SMALL SIGNAL FFT MODELS: OCOG-3Modeling the small-signal response of OCOG-3 devices enabled significant
simplification of OCOG-2 simulations. The device response was assumed to be linear,
independent of history or signal intensity for small signals. As such, the electric fields
across the device were assumed to be constant. Additionally, as in OCOG-1 simulations,
regular carrier diffusion in the z direction was ignored. Four impulse functions, G(t),
R(t), D(t), and S(t), were convolved to model device behavior and are described below.
x To determine the voltage across the device, it is assumed that there is no field across the doped regionsthemselves in spite of local space charge effects.
153
This small-signal simulation method is analogous to a Green’s function approach that has
been used in p-i-n models elsewhere.[1, 14, 26-28]
G(t):
To determine the device behavior, first the intensity of the incident light as a
function of time, G(t), was determined. We assume that the incident light has a Gaussian
time evolution, parameterized by specifying the full-width half-maximum, �FWHM, of the
control pulse (see Fig. 3).
� �2
0 2exp/ ln(2)FWHM
tG t I�
� ��� � �
� �(7.32)
It was also assumed that the spatial shape of the pulse was Gaussian, Eq. (7.6), whose
spot size (1/e2) radius, w0, was an adjustable parameter. This value was used later when
the diffusive conduction response was determined. Intensity dependence based on the
spot size was not modeled since small signal response was assumed to be independent of
the intensity.
Figure 7.3: G(t), the normalized incident light pulse that creates photogenerated carriers. In thissimulation, �FWHM=2 ps.
R(t):
As the control pulse was incident on the device, the light was absorbed during one
instantaneous moment – in a sense, a very short “time slice” of the control pulse –
creating photogenerated carriers that began to separate and shield the voltage across the
154
top intrinsic region. R(t) was the normalized change in voltage (rise-time behavior)
across the top diode as a function in time due solely to the separation of photogenerated
carriers of an arbitrary “time slice.” This function was calculated using a simplified
form of the OCOG-1 simulation. The parameters used were the overall reverse bias from
which the constant electron and hole drift velocities were determined, the intrinsic region
thickness, and, to determine the initial charge distribution, the absorption coefficient.
Fig. 7.4 provides a sample function for R(t).
Figure 7.4: R(t), the change in voltage shielding across the top intrinsic layer due to the absorption of ainstantaneous light pulse. Parameters used in this simulation were a 0.3 �m intrinsic layer thickness andthe absorption coefficient for 425 nm light (~2x105 cm-1) in the intrinsic region.
D(t):
Next, the voltage decay, D(t), of an instantaneous amount of new voltage
shielding was calculated by solving the multi-layer diffusion eigenvector problem
described in Chapter 4 and specifying for which layer in the structure the resulting
diffusive conduction time dependence was determined (such as the MQW bottom
intrinsic layer). For example, in a two-layer device D(t) is described by Eq. (4.48). For
this type of calculation, the resistance per square and the capacitance per unit area for
each layer of the device needed to be specified as well as the spot size radius. The initial
voltage distribution used was normalized to 1 V in the top layer and zero volts across the
other layers.
155
Figure 7.5: D(t), the voltage decay in the bottom layer of a two-layer device due to diffusive conduction ofa “time slice” of voltage shielding. Simulation parameters were: Rsq=[100; 1000; 10] ���,Carea=[0.3; 0.1] fF/�m2, w0=3.5 �m)
S(t):
The read-out probe (signal) pulse was assumed to have the same functional form
as G(t).
The voltage dynamics of an OCOG-3 device were calculated using the first three
of these temporal responses. For each “time slice” of the initial control pulse,
photogenerated carriers were created whose voltage build-up was determined. And each
“time slice” of voltage build-up decayed due to the calculated diffusive conduction.
Overall device response, therefore, was determined by convolving the temporal pulse
shape with the voltage build-up function and the diffusive conduction response. Finally,
since the data collected used a read-out (signal) beam, the temporal shape of this second
light pulse also needed to be accounted for. Simply convolving the device response with
the temporal shape of the read-out pulse, which was assumed identical to the control
pulse, provided the measured device behavior, as Eq. (7.33) expresses.
Voltage (t) = 0 0 0
( ') ( ' '') ( '' ''') ( ''') ''' '' 'S t t D t t R t t G t dt dt dt� � �
� � �� � � (7.33)
In the actual simulation program, the convolution was actually over a finite, albeit
relatively long, time period and is solved numerically, not analytically. By assuming a
1 V total initial buildup in the top diode, and using normalized laser pulse and voltage
156
build-up response functions (the integral of each was unity), the final output provided the
voltage as a function of time across the layer of interest.
Figure 7.6: Convolution of G(t), R(t), D(t), and S(t) from Figs. 7.3, 7.4, and 7.5 above, providing thesmall-signal voltage response of the bottom layer of a two-layer device.
Multiple pulses
Multiple control pulses were simple to model using this simulation. By
convolving the input control pulse with a series of time-separated delta functions, overall
device response to such burst-logic sequences was readily obtained as shown in Fig. 7.7.
The pulse repetition rate limit is strongly influenced by the decay tail, which falls off
much more slowly than an exponential response, particularly for just single or
double-layered devices. New pulses rest on the tails of previous ones
As the pulse repetition rate increases, the base level of the voltage across the
devices at spot center (the dashed lines) shifts and the relative contrast ratio -- the voltage
difference between the toughs and valleys -- shrinks. As each dotted line indicates, the
rise in the base bias voltage quickly reaches a limiting value for given repetition rate.
Pattern dependence thus may become important as the bit rate increases.
157
Figure 7.7: Small signal simulation of multiple pulses with various repetition periods. The simulationshave been offset for ease of viewing. The simulation parameters were the same as those used in Fig. 7.3 –7.4 except that the resistances here: Rsq=[10;100;10] ���. Spacing between pulses was 25, 12.5 and 8 psfor the bottom, middle, and topmost simulations, respectively. Note that as the spacing between the pulsesdiminished, the next pulse starts to rise before the previous pulse finishes. Consequently, the effectivecontrast ratio of a pulse shrinks and, as the dashed lines indicate, a voltage offset develops.
Off-center simulations
These small-signal simulations were also used to model the off-center response of
OCOGs (e.g., Fig. 6.8) To accomplish this, the impulse diffusive conduction function
(the multilayer version of Eq. (7.8)), D(t), was calculated using a specified radial
distance, �, from the spot center for the particular layer in the device of interest.
158
REFERENCES
1. Schneider, H. and K.v. Klitzing, "Thermionic emission and gaussian transport ofholes in a GaAs/AlxGa1-xAs multiple-quantum-well structure," Phys. Rev. B, vol.38, pp. 6160-6165 (1988).
2. Cavailles, J.A., et al., "Simultaneous measurement of electron and hole escapetimes from biased single quantum wells," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 61, pp. 426-428(1992).
3. Hutchings, D.C., C.B. Park, and A. Miller, "Modeling of cross-well carriertransport in a multiple quantum well modulator," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 59, pp.3009-3011 (1991).
4. Massa, J.S., G.S. Buller, and A.C. Walker, "Time-resolved photoluminescencestudies of cross-well transport in a biased GaAs/AlGaAs multiple quantum wellp-i-n structure," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 82, pp. 712-717 (1997).
5. Kagawa, T., et al., "Electron escape rate from coupled multiple quantum wells:Effects of coherence lengh and hopping," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 51, pp. 7772-7777(1995).
6. Ricco, B. and M.Y. Azbel, "Physics of resonant tunneling. The one-dimensionaldouble-barrier case," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 29, pp. 1970-1981 (1984).
7. Fujiwara, K., K. Kawashima, and T. Imanishi, "Tunneling escape time ofelectrons from the quasibound Stark localized states in ultrathin barrierGaAs/AlAs superlattices," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 54, pp. 17724-17729 (1996).
8. Levine, B.F., et al., "Photoexcited esape probability, optical gain, and noise inquantum well infrared photodetectors," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 72, pp. 4429-4443(1992).
9. Cavailles, J.A., et al., "Simultaneous Measurements of Electron and Hole Sweep-Out from Quantum Wells and Modeling of Photoinduced Field ScreeningDynamics," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 28, pp. 2486-2497 (1992).
10. Zhang, J.M. and D.R. Conn, "State-Space Modeling of the PIN Photodetector," J.Lightwave Tech., vol. 10, pp. 603-609 (1992).
11. Livescu, G., et al., "High-speed absorption recovery in quantum well diodes bydiffusive electrical conduction," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 54, pp. 748-750 (1989).
12. Dentan, M. and B.d. Cremoux, "Numerical Simulation of the Nonlinear Responseof a p-i-n Photodiode Under High Illumination," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 8, pp.1137-1144 (1990).
13. Williams, K.J., R.D. Esman, and M. Dagenais, "Nonlinearities in p-i-nMicrowave Photodetectors," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 84-96 (1996).
159
14. Wang, H., et al., "Ultrafast Cross-Well carrier Transport in a Strained Multiple-Quantum-Well InGaAs-GaAs p-i-n Modulator," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 33, pp.192-197 (1997).
15. Miller, A., C.B. Park, and P. LiKamWa, "Time resolved measurements of cross-well transport in a multiple quantum well p-i-n modulator at high photogeneratedcarrier densities," Appl. Phys. Lett., vol. 60, pp. 97-99 (1992).
16. Fraenkel, A., et al., "Vertical drift mobility of excited carriers in multi quantumwell structures," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 75, pp. 3536 (1994).
17. Brennan, K. and K. Hess, "Theory of high-field transport of holes inAl0.45Ga0.55As," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 59, pp. 964-966 (1986).
18. Deveaud, B., et al., "Optical Studies of Perpendicular Transport in SemiconductorSuperlattices," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 24, pp. 1641-1651 (1988).
19. Williams, K.J., R.D. Esman, and M. Dagenais, "Effects of High Space-ChargeFields on the Response of Microwave Photodetectors," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett.,vol. 6, pp. 639-641 (1994).
20. Harari, J., et al., "Modeling of Microwave Top Illuminated PIN PhotodetectorUnder Very High Optical Power," IEEE Trans. Microwave Thry. Tech., vol. 44,pp. 1484-1487 (1996).
21. Adachi, S., GaAs and Related Materialspp. 387 (World Scientific Publishing,Singapore, 1994).
22. Sze, S.M., Physics of Semiconductor Devices. 2nd Ed. (John Wiley and Sons,New York, 1981).
23. Thim, H.W., "Computer Study of Bulk devices with Random One-DimensionalDoping Fluctuations," J. Appl. Phys., vol. 39, pp. 3897-3904 (1968).
24. Barry, D.M., C.M. Snowden, and M.J. Howes, A Numerical Simulation of HighSpeed GaAs Photodetectors in IEE Colloquium on Microwave Devices,Fundamentals and Applications (1988).
25. Press, W.H., et al., Numberical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific Computing pp.51, 838, 849 (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1992).
26. Bradley, P.J., C. Rigo, and A. Stano, "Carrier Induced Transient Electric Field ina p-i-n InP-InGaAs Multiple-Quantum-Well Modulator," IEEE J. Quant. Elec.,vol. 32, pp. 43 (1996).
27. Yang, C.-M., et al., "Measurement of Effective Drift Velocities of Electrons andHoles in Shallow Multiple-Quantum-Well p-i-n Modulators," IEEE J. Quant.Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1498-1506 (1997).
160
28. Liu, H., High speed, low driving voltage vertical cavity MQW modulators foroptical interconnect and communication, in Electrical Engineering, (StanfordUniversity, Stanford, 2001).
161
Chapter VIII: Discussion and Future Directions
Motivation to study and use OCOGs was initially established throughout this
study followed by an overview of a representative selection of different types of optical
devices. The intervening chapters presented a detailed description of optically-controlled
optical gates (OCOGs) and data showing low-powered 50 GHz burst-logic operation.
This brings us to our current state of knowledge. In this final chapter we draw the
conclusion of this work and discuss future possible directions.
8.1 ULTIMATE LIMITS OF OCOG DEVICES
We are now in a position to answer the questions that were posed in Chapter 1:
∙ What are the underlying physical principles that govern the operation of
OCOG devices and how do these principles constrain its performance?
∙ What switching energies are required?
∙ How fast can OCOGs operate and over what wavelength range?
These questions are addressed throughout this section.
There are four ways to reduce the gating time of OCOGs. (1) Reduce the
thickness of the photodetector intrinsic region. As this layer thins, the transit time for
photogenerated carriers diminishes, reducing the turn-on time of the gate. Moreover,
there is a reduction in the bias voltage needed to provide a particular electric field. Two
disadvantages arise, however. First, the break-down voltage is similarly reduced,
limiting the total possible change in voltage. Second, the thinner layer increases the
capacitance and so slows down the diffusive conduction recovery. (2) The device may be
grown with greater doping of the n and or p layers to reduce Rsq. This increases the
diffusive conduction decay, speeding up device recovery. However, diffusive conduction
also eats away at the voltage change as it is rising during the “turn-on” stage. The result
is a smaller overall change in voltage. (3) The spot size of the incident light can be made
smaller. Not only does this provide faster diffusive conduction (with the same pros and
cons as for a lower resistance), but at the same time it reduces the required energy needed
for switching – a significant advantage. The flip-side is that the slower, non-linear
large-signal response occurs at lower total incident energies. (4) The functional form of
162
the decay of diffusive conduction can be altered by using multi-layered devices. As
described in Chapter 4, the signature hyperbolic decay, �/(�+t), may be made to fall at
significantly faster rates as a function of time due to the coupling of the voltage behavior
between layers. The result can be a much sharper decay, allowing for simultaneously
lower-power and faster devices. The initial voltage is, however, divided among the many
layers. Consequently, the magnitude of the voltage changes is reduced – the price of the
faster decay. It should be noted that although the gating time can be significantly
shortened for particular layers, the overall repetition rate is limited by the response of the
slowest layer which may not improve as quickly.
There is a fundamental trade-off between switching times and switching energy.
In each of the above options, switching speed can be increased but only at the expense of
a reduction in the possible voltage swing. The answers to the questions of “How fast can
it switch?” and “How much will it cost (in energy)?” are thus entangled. Also, their
relationship is not always linear: i.e., reducing the time by a factor of two means that
more energy will be needed, but not necessarily twice as much. Many factors are
involved in this complex interaction. Establishing what constraints are most important
for a particular application can significantly limit the range of some of these variables and
simplify the optimization to be determined.
The practical gating speed of OCOG is constrained by three factors: (1) the
separation of the photogenerated carriers, (2) the diffusive-conduction relaxation of
voltage change, and (3) the pulse length of the optical beams. A reasonable system-level
restriction might be limiting control power to 10 mW, which corresponds to 100 fJ per
pulse at 100 GHz repetition rates. For significant absorption modulation, voltages on the
order of a few volts across a micron of QW material are typically needed. Spot sizes on
the order of 2 �m radius are obtainable, ultimately limited by the diffraction limit of the
light. Taken together, this suggests that the energy needed for OCOG switching at
100 GHz will require energy greater than about 10 fJ per pulse. This is significantly less
than the 100 fJ limit assigned above. However, this value does not account for diffusive
conduction decay even as the change in voltage is growing, nor the percentage of voltage
that will fall across other layers, nor parasitic light loss. Finally, the pulse length
available must be considered. Inexpensive short-pulse lasers with high repetition rates
163
are not yet commercially available. Given the current state of research, it is conceivable
that in the near future sources such as mode-locked fiber or on-chip lasers would be able
to provide pulses in the 1-2 ps range. This value is important when, for 100 GHz
operation, the total switching time must be on the order of 10 ps or less.
With these constraints, the challenge becomes designing a system in which the
diffusive conduction is able to close the switching window quickly while also allowing
the voltage to change significantly. In a proposed next-generation OCOG device,
OCOG-4, these constraints have been addressed in order to achieve useful ultra-fast
gating (see Fig. 8.1). The top intrinsic region is made thin so that the build-up time for
the voltage is small and multiple p and n regions are used to decrease the diffusive
recovery time of the bottom MQW region in an n-i-p-n-p-n-i(MQW)-n structure.
Although it comes at a price of low efficiency (the voltage shielding in the top layer is
divided among the many layers), the result is a 2 ps optoelectronic gate.
A small-signal simulation is presented in Fig. 8.1. The change in voltage of 3 V
across a 1 �m MQW region is obtained with a switching window that is 7 ps FW10%M
(3 ps FWHM), sufficient for 100 GHz operation. The energy required for this operation
is predicted to be 150 fJ (not including parasitic light-loss), which is close to the 100 fJ
goal. It was important in designing this structure to restrain the voltage diffusion
enhancement of the middle layers so that the voltage was not eaten away too quickly.
Obtaining a large capacitance (20 fF/�m2) with highly resistive layers (20 k���) was
essential to achieving this object but not easy to accomplish. Large capacitance is
possible with very thin depletion regions. However, a thin depletion region requires high
doping of the p and n layers, providing highly conductive instead of resistive layers.
These competing effects practically cancel each other, making large RC p-n junctions
difficult to grow. Future studies may try to accomplish this by using low-mobility
material such as Al0.3Ga0.7As in AlxGa1-xAs systems for n-doped layers. Deliberately
disordered material may also satisfy these opposing requirements.
164
0 5 10 15 20
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
7 ps FW10%MCha
nge
in R
efle
ctiv
ity (
a.u.
)
Time (ps)
Figure 8.1: Small-signal simulation of next-generation OCOG device. This is ann-i-p-i-p-i-p-i-p-i-p-i (MQW)-n structure with paramaters of R=[300; 5 k; 20 k; 20 k; 20 k; 20 k; 10] ���,C=[0.6; l2.0; 2.0; 2.0; 2.0; 0.1] fJ/�m2 using a 3.5��m spot size radius. The FW10%M=7 ps.
Pushing for even faster gating times without significantly increasing the energy
for switching will likely prove to be quite difficult for OCOG devices. Spot size will be
constrained by diffraction effects, turn-on time is limited by the speed that electrons and
holes can separate (about 0.1 �m per picosecond), and material constraints might limit
the resistance and capacitance available for the layers. But it is possible that more
carefully tailored coupled layers may be able to provide some relief to the required
switching energies, and absorption-sensitive layers may emerge that require significantly
less electric field changes to alter their absorption and hence the signal pulse.
The wavelength range of OCOG devices is typically on the order of 10 nm, the
shift of exciton peak with the change in electric field. This value depends heavily on the
specific QW design used. Placing OCOGs within a resonant structure, such as an
asymmetric Fabry-Perot cavity, could be used to significantly reduce its control energy
165
but at the price of a reduced wavelength operating range and more complex design.i
At sufficiently large input control pulse energies, the device response deviates
from its linear response: the change in reflectivity approaches a limit and the switching
time slows significantly. As described in Chapter 6, if the incident power is sufficient to
significantly shield the reverse bias in the control diode, device recovery slows due
primarily to the reduction of the vertical drift current. The pulse energy at which these
effects begin to dominate device response determines the dynamic range of the input
control pulse and is strongly dependent on the spot size (energy density), absorption
length, and the magnitude of reverse bias that can be applied without breakdown.
The signal energy is also important to consider. Although it is possible to use
signal energies larger than the control pulse energies (recall the effective gain of the
OCOG-1 device, demonstrated in Fig. 6.4), the absorption of the signal pulse creates
photogenerated carriers in the MQW modulator diode. As these carriers separate, they
shield the reverse bias in the modulator diode section that may effect subsequent signal
pulses. This behavior tends to limit the signal energies. The particular pulse energies at
which this effect becomes dominant and the resulting changes in switching time depend
on the specific sweep-out and voltage diffusion dynamics of a particular device. In
practice, we found it difficult to achieve greater than a gain of a factor of 2 (signal
energies about 5 times the control energies) while the fastest results were obtained with
signal energies typically one-tenth the control energy.
Ignoring the matter of more practical switching devices, it is interesting to also
consider the fundamental limitations of diffusive conduction itself. This issue was
discussed in Chapter 4; the conclusions are reiterated here. When a large number of
photogenerated carriers are created within a small spot size and separate, creating a
shielding voltage with a large lateral gradient, large lateral electric fields are present. In
such circumstances the voltage diffusion tends not to be as large as expected. Voltage
diffusion also slows, limited by the thermal velocities of the carriers, if the lateral device
dimensions are small (e.g., approximately 0.1 �m) or if the diffusive conduction time
constant, �, is shorter than the momentum scattering time. Finally, if strong magnetic
i There have been some clever designs in surface-normal optical switches that use asymmetric Fabry-Perotresonances but which manage to have a wide operating wavelength range.[1]
166
fields are created due to large electric fields and fast diffusion times, voltage decay
becomes LC limited, analagous to a 2D lossless transmission line -- the voltage decay is
limited by the speed of light in the medium.
8.2 HOW DO OCOGS COMPARE TO OTHER OPTICAL
SWITCHES?This dissertation has provided a firm background for understanding the
capabilities of OCOG devices. With this knowledge we can more fully consider in what
practical systems, if any, OCOGs should be used and how OCOGs compare to other
optical switches in this regard. As described in Chapter 1, data in today’s world is
commonly transferred across long distances encoded as optical bits in fiber optic cable.
The bit rate of individual data channels in a fiber has steadily risen over the past decade.
Over 1 Tbps has been demonstrated for a single channel, as has 20 wavelength channels
each at 160 Gbps and 160 wavelength channels each at 10 Gbps, as Fig. 8.2 (excerpted
from Ref. [2]) shows. The current section addressed the following question: What role is
there for optical switches in a global network of interlaced optical datastreams?
When one endpoint in an optical network sends data to another endpoint, the
system that enables this communication provides two functions. (1) First, the system
routes the data from one endpoint to another. If necessary, the characteristics of the
bitstream may be altered to facilitate this service. For example, the bit rate of the data
may be changed, the wavelength of the data shifted, or the fiber down which the data
travels may be switched. (2) Second, the system ensures that the data sent is still in a
readable form by the time it reaches its destination. Distortion, attenuation, and
cross-talk among other factors culminate to reduce the signal-to-noise ratio of the data
stream. The system must provide 3R functionality (regeneration, reshaping, and
retiming) to maintain the datastream’s viability. To date, all aspects of these two
functions have been handled electronically using OEOs. As mentioned in Chapter 1, the
logic required for determining where to direct an incoming data signal -- the routing
look-up -- is complex and is likely to remain as an electronic process for the foreseeable
future. For many of the other functions that the network management system provides,
167
however, the required logic is minimal and optical switches may challenge traditional
electronics. It is not hard to envision a network in which a datastream, once sent, remains
in an optical form from start to finish. Whether or not this is a vision of the near or
distant future remains uncertain.
Figure 8.2: Reported demonstrations of data transmission in a fiber optic cable. The right-most (bolded)diagonal line represents transmission with only one data channel (wavelength) in the fiber. Moving to theleft in the chart, the number of data channels per fiber increases, typically with reduced bit rates perchannel. The total bit rate per fiber is represented by the y-axis.
The most likely point-of-entry for optical switches is use in restoration switch
fabrics; indeed, this has already begun to occur commercially. Restoration networks
require the ability to redirect tens or hundreds of light beams from fiber optic cables,
whether single or multi-wavelength channels, in case a fiber breaks or needs repair. They
are also used to adjust to slow changes in traffic patterns by reprovisioning network
bandwidth so that it is efficiently allocated. These have been the prime motivators for the
use of optical MEMS switches in telecommunications networks even though their
switching times are relatively slow (microseconds to milliseconds) compared to other
switches. MEMS switches can be bit rate, format, and wavelength independent,
providing much useful functionality. Using these switches avoids duplication of
expensive OEOs. Moreover, improvements in speed and flexibility are constantly being
168
made. For example, the electro-holographic switch of Trellis Photonics mentioned in
Chapter 2 [3] demonstrates switching at time scales about 1000 faster (nanoseconds)
combined with wavelength filtering, and research on MEMS-based tunable arrayed
waveguide gratings on nanosecond time scales may open the door to wide incorporation
of all-optical switches inside networks.[4]
Individual computers’ bitstreams are interconnected across the globe in a
hierarchical manner. Data is aggregated from the slower channels at the edges into
higher bitrate datastreams at progressively higher levels in the network, and the ability to
accomplish this multiplexing is essential (as is demultiplexing for the opposite operation).
Such time division multiplexing (TDM) is currently accomplished using OEOs. As
Fig. 8.2 shows, the ability to transport data at hundreds of GHz is feasible. It becomes
quite difficult to manage this using electrical switches at bit rates of 40 GHz and
higher.[5] Fortunately, several types of optical switches have demonstrated TDM
functionality at hundreds of GHz and may find themselves useful for this network
requirement.[5-8]
Another difficulty may arise when there are hundreds of different wavelength
channels that arrive at a switching node. It is useful to be able to switch data that is on
one particular wavelength channel onto a different wavelength. This increases the
connectivity of the routing node and helps avoid wavelength contention. Wavelength
conversion, too, is relatively easily accomplished with OEOs since the wavelength and
spatial location of the output is disjoint from the incoming data. This process is
discouragingly expensive and becomes increasingly difficult to scale as both the number
of wavelengths and bit rate rise. Although the choice of wavelength may change slowly
(e.g., at the packet or frame rate, if not slower), the actual conversion occurs at the bit
rate. This requires minimal logic and fast switching, allowing subsystems that use
all-optical switches to provide a viable alternative to OEOs. There is an excellent review
in Ref. [9], and research has been extensive with several hundred papers written in the
year 2000 alone. References [10-13], for example, provide a flavor of current
experimental work.
There is a significant caveat in this discussion about wavelength conversion and
TDM. Since wavelength conversion and TDM are relatively easy to implement if OEOs
169
are used in the system, all-optical implementations will likely be widely useful only when
the other functionalities of OEO switches, such as retiming, reshaping, and
reamplification are also done all-optically. This is possible because 3-R also does not
require extensive logic. While optical 3-R devices have been demonstrated,[11, 14-16]
whether or not all-optical buffering is also needed is an open question. However, their
incorporation into the network would require not only proven functionality but also a
significant redesign of the system, subsystem, and perhaps even network architecture,
dramatically increasing the effective cost of such a switch. It is not clear if there is a
progressive incremental path for incorporating these types of changes or if an abrupt,
more revolutionary path would be needed.
Optical switches come in wide varieties, as the number of them described in
Chapter 2 shows. The energies and time required for switching provide a sense of the
efficiency of a device. But the fastest switch with the lowest energy is not necessarily the
one that is best to use. The type of switch to use is application-dependent. Each switch
has it pros and cons and that matching changes, too, as technologies are introduced and
refined. Table 8.1 presents a short listing of some optical switches and the applications
for which they might be particularly suited. Presently, XPM in SOA interferometers
seem to offer good switching characteristics that can be integrated with a wide variety of
optical and electronic systems and stand out (in this author’s eyes) from the crowd.
These devices are relatively large, often millimeters in length and hundreds of microns
wide, and their interferometric nature makes them sensitive to fluctuations such as
temperature. Advances in non-linear materials continues to advance, as the switching
capability of PPLN waveguides demonstrates. OCOGs are neither the lowest energy nor
fastest switch. However, when its switching requirements are combined with its
two-dimensional scalability, it becomes an attractive option for applications that need an
array of NxN switches. The cost of the insertion loss of OCOGs due to their
absorption-based switching might be worth the price if the resulting electronic signal (the
average power for a given input datastream) is used for data-monitoring functionality.
170
Table 8.1: Comparison Between Selected All-Optical SwitchesType of Switch Energy Speed Pros Cons Applications Refs.
Soliton Gates 1-10 pJ 200 GHz fast, size, TDM, [17-19]all-fiber latency optical logic
SOAsXPM (fiber) 0.5-1 pJ 100 GHz integration & [8]
fast, size (fiber) TDM,integrable, wavelength
XPM (waveguide) 0.05-1 pJ 160 GHz 1-D complexity, conversion [11](1-10 pJ) input power
range
Coherent Wave Mixing 5-10 pJ 100 GHz fast, phase match, TDM, [20, 21] (PPLN Waveguides) 1-D, fabrication wavelength
format conversion independent,
multi-�
OCOGs 1-2 pJ 50 GHz 2-D, contrast ratio, NxN [22, 23]integrable insertion loss switch fabrics
8.3 FUTURE RESEARCH DIRECTIONS
There are several directions that would be fruitful to explore in future research.
More optimized multi-layer OCOG devices, such as the OCOG-4 described previously in
this chapter (see Fig. 8.1), provide an opportunity to both enhance the viability of OCOG
devices in general and also offer a chance to study the behavior of charge transport and
electromagnetic interactions with semiconductor material at a picosecond time scale,
perhaps faster. Designing a device with very low resistance may prove to be a good test
bed for examining how voltage diffusion changes from being RC constrained to being
limited by electromagnetic propagation (LC behavior).
171
pin
Modulator diode, Vm
Control diode, Vc
CW signal
Control data stream
Figure 8.32: Scematic illustration of an dual-diode optically controlled waveguide switch (OCWS). Whenproperly biased, the surface-normal incident control data stream is imprinted, through cross-absorptionmodulation, onto the c.w. signal light that travels along the length of the waveguide.
Creative solutions to the low contrast ratio of OCOG devices can also be
explored. There is an effort now underway at Stanford that seeks to accomplish this and
is briefly described here.[24] The primary limitation to achieving a large contrast ratio in
an OCOG is that the active region is only a micron or so thick, providing insufficient
length to absorb most of the signal light near the heavy-hole exciton frequency.
However, by changing the geometry of the device, this problem may be overcome.
While still maintaining the surface-normal incident control light, the signal light may
instead propagate along a waveguide onto which the control light shines (Fig. 8.3). In
this configuration, referred to as an optically controlled waveguide switch (OCWS), the
signal light now sees an effective active region as long as the width of the spot size
which can be tens or hundreds of microns long, as desired. Although there are several
difficulties that must be addressed regarding the switching behavior of such a device and
its construction is complex, it holds significant promise to provide not only high bit-rate
switching with contrast ratios of 10 or 20 dB but also switching over a broad wavelength
range (e.g., 30 nm). This is possible because the extended interaction region allows the
device to be operated relatively far from the exciton peak with smaller changes of
absorption. Moreover, because the control and signal beams are not co-propagating, in a
dual-diode configuration the top diode may be made completely absorbing to both signals
(since only the control is incident on it). This allows more efficient light collection and
the ability to provide effective wavelength conversion from a larger wavelength control
stream to a lower wavelength signal and vice-versa.
172
�2
Vc
Input data streams:
�a
�1 �3 Modulatedoutput signals:
�b
Vc
�c
c.w. signals Vc
OCWS, disabledtransparent for signallight in bottom diode(waveguide)
OCWS, enabledmodulating signal light inbottom diode (waveguide)due to top-illumination
Figure 8.4: Conceptual view of a reconfigurable NxN wavelength converter based on OCWS devices. c.w.light is launched into each of the waveguides. The default bias condition of the OCWS devices(n-i-p-i(MQW)-n) can be set so that they are relatively transparent (illustrated by the grey boxes) to thesignal light travelling along the waveguide and no modulation occurs regardless of the presence or absenceof surface-normal incident light (the data streams). An OCWS can be biased, however, (illustrated bygreen boxes) so that the light in the bottom diode (the waveguide) is strongly absorbed unless light isincident from the top. In this configuration the data of the incident surface-normal light is imprinted ontothe light stream travelling along the waveguide.
A single waveguide structure can be processed so that several OCWS devices lie
along its length. Each OCWS device can be biased so that it is either “enabled” or
“disabled.” In a “disabled” device, the top diode’s bias is set close to zero.
Consequently, no voltage change may be induced across the bottom diode regardless of
the presence or absence of control (surface-incident) light. At the same time, the bottom
diode may be biased so that it is relatively transparent, allowing the signal light to pass by
unimpeded.ii In an “enabled” device, on the other hand, the situation is different. The
bottom diode is biased so that the signal light is fully absorbed. If there is an incident
control pulse from the top, however, a change in voltage is induced in the bottom diode,
making it transparent. Thereby, the data stream of the control light is transferred to the
signal light propagating along the waveguide. By properly enabling or disabling the
OCWS devices along a waveguide, any one of the surface-normal incident beams,
ii See Fig. B.1 for an example of the relationship between the voltage and the absorption in a p-i(MQW)-ndiode.
173
regardless of their wavelength (assuming they are absorbed in the top diode), may be
imprinted onto the signal wavelength passing through the waveguide. As Fig. 8.4
illustrates, multiple waveguides may be used to create an NxN, non-blocking wavelength
space switch.[25] In Fig. 8.4 we have assumed that each control bitstream is incident on
all of the waveguides. Such a configuration requires at least a 1/N power loss per
OCWS. Other designs, however, may be used which avoid this limitation.[23]
Telecommunications has been the focus for optical switches in this dissertation.
There are additional areas of research where OCOGs may also find use. OCOGs can be
used as components in optical interconnects, for instance between chips in a computer.
They can be used as gated photodetectors in optoelectronic sampling devices such as
analog-to-digital converters. An OCOG could also be used as an interesting mode-locker
in a laser, simultaneously providing a feedback mechanism for laser stabilization control.
8.4 CONCLUSIONS (SUMMARY)Optically controlled optical gates are interesting and potentially useful devices.
This dissertation has presented the theory behind their operation and experimental results
demonstrating their capabilities. The large electric fields created due to carrier
separation, combined with the quantum confined Stark effect of MQWs, enables large
changes in absorption that require only small optical control energy. Device recovery is
based on diffusive conduction and may occur on a picosecond time scale with proper
device design when the control and modulation functions are spatially distinct. The use
of multiple layers in the device can provide particularly sharp and fast recovery, although
at the cost of reduced intensity modulation. 50 GHz burst-logic operation has been
demonstrated, as have contrast ratios of 2-to-1 using 1.5 pJ pulses.
We began with a motivation for the use of optical switches in telecommunications
and ended with a discussion of their potential roles as, principally, ultrafast time division
multiplexing and demultiplexing components and wavelength conversion devices. A
variety of optical switches were described and OCOGs placed within their context. Low
energy optoelectronic switching and scalability in two-dimensional arrays make OCOGs
intriguing and worthy of further study and consideration as practical devices.
174
REFERENCES
1. Loka, H.S. and P.W.E. Smith, "Ultrafast All-Optical Switching with anSymmetric Faby-Perot Device Using Low-Temperature-Grown GaAs: Materialand Device Issues," IEEE J. Quant. Elec., vol. 36, pp. 100-111 (2000).
2. Nakazawa, M., "Solitons for Breaking Barriers to Terabit/Second WDM andOTDM Transmission in the Next Millennium," IEEE J. Selected Topics Quant.Elec., vol. 6, pp. 1332-1343 (2000).
3. Agranat, A.J., et al., The Electroholographic Optical Switch (Trellis Photonics,2000).
4. Yu, K. and O. Solgaard, Personal Communication (2001).
5. Takara, H., "High-speed optical time-division-multiplexed signal generation,"Optical and Quant. Elec., vol. 33, pp. 795-810 (2001).
6. Saruwatari, M., "All-Optical Signal Processing for Terabit/Second OpticalTransmission," IEEE J. Selected Top. Quant. Elec., vol. 6, pp. 1363-1374 (2000).
7. Kawanishi, S., "Ultrahigh-Speed Optical Time-Division-MultiplexedTransmission Technology Based on Optical Signal Processing," IEEE J. Quant.Elec., vol. 34, pp. 2064-2079 (1998).
8. Runser, R.J., et al., "Interferometric ultrafast SOA-based optical switches: Fromdevices to applications," Optical and Quantum Electronics, vol. 33, pp. 841-874(2001).
9. Yoo, S.J.B., "Wavelength Conversion Technologies for WDM NetworkApplications," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 955-966 (1996).
10. Durhuus, T., et al., "All-Optical Wavelength Conversion by SemiconductorOptical Amplifiers," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 14, pp. 942-954 (1996).
11. Tajima, K., S. Nakamura, and Y. Ueno, "Ultrafast all-optical signal processingwith Symmetric Mach-Zhender type all-optical switches," Optical and QuantumElectronics, vol. 33, pp. 875-897 (2001).
12. Geraghty, D.F., et al., "Wavelength Conversion for WDM CommunicationSystems Using Four-Wave Mixing in Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers," IEEEJ. Selected Topics Quant. Elec., vol. 3, pp. 1146-1155 (1997).
13. Yu, J., et al., "40-Gb/s All-Optical Wavelength Conversion Based on a NonlinearOptical Loop Mirror," J. Lightwave Tech., vol. 18, pp. 1001-1006 (2000).
14. Fischer, S., et al., "Optical 3R regenerator for 40 Gbit/s networks," Elec. Lett.,vol. 35, pp. 2047-2049 (1999).
175
15. Otani, T., T. Miyazaki, and S. Yamamoto, "Optical 3R Regenerator UsingWavelength Converters Based on Electroabsoprtion Modulator for All-OpticalNetwork Applications," IEEE Phot. Tech. Lett., vol. 12, pp. 431-433 (2000).
16. Sartorius, B., 3R regeneration for all-optical networks in International Conferenceon Transparent Optical Networks, 2001 (2001).
17. Islam, M.N., C.E. Soccolich, and D.A.B. Miller, "Low-energy ultrafast fibersoliton logic gate," Opt. Lett., vol. 15, pp. 909-911 (1990).
18. Islam, M.N., C.E. Soccolich, and J.P. Gordon, "Ultrafast digital soliton logicgates," Optical and Quantum Electronics, vol. 24, pp. S1215-S1235 (1992).
19. Friberg, S.R., "Demonstration of colliding-soliton all-optical switching," Appl.Phys. Lett., vol. 63, pp. 429-431 (1993).
20. Kawanishi, S., et al., "All-optical modulation and time-division-muliplexing of100 Gbit/s signal using quasi-pasematched mixing in LiNb03 waveguides," Elec.Lett., vol. 36, pp. 1568-1569 (2000).
21. Parameswaran, K., Personal Communication (2001).
22. Yairi, M.B., H.V. Demir, and D.A.B. Miller, "Optically controlled optical gatewith an optoelectronic dual diode structure - theory and experiment," Optical andQuant. Elec., vol. 33, pp. 1035-1054 (2001).
23. Demir, H.V., D.A.B. Miller, and V. Sabnis, "Surface-Normal OpticallyControlled, Lumped RC, Waveguide Switch," Stanford University Patent no. S01-210 (2001).
24. Sabnis, V., et al., Observation of Wavelength-Converting Optical Switching at 2.5GHz in a Surface-Normal Illuminated Waveguide in IEEE Lasers and Electo-Optical Society 2001 (2001).
25. Miller, D.A.B., "Ultrafast Quantum Well Optoelectronic Devices," StanfordUniversity Patent no. S97-015 (2001).
176
Appendix A: Example of Multilayer DiffusiveConduction Calculation
This section describes in more detail how to determine the coupling diffusion matrix,
D�
, for an arbitrary multilayered structure.
Ji,x
Ii,xIi, x-1
Figure A.1: Illustration depicting Ii and Ji.
The variables used are shown below in Table A.1 and some are illustrated in Fig. A.1.
Recall that for N (capacitive) layers, there are N+1 resistive planes. Some of the variables
are per layer, while others are per resistive plane; care should be taken in relationships
involving both N and N+1 indices.
Table A.1: Multiple-Layer Variables
Ci i=1 to N Capacitance
Vi i=1 to N Voltage across a layer
(“vertical”, between resistor planes)
Ri i=1 to N+1 Resistance
Ii i=1 to N+1 Current along a resistor plane
Ji=Ii+1-Ii i=1 to N “Vertical” current (current between resistor planes)
177
The N J’s are related to the N+1 I’s by:
11
21 2
1
1
for 1< i <N+1ii i
NN
dI JdxdI J JdxdI J JdxdI Jdx
�
�
� �
� �
� �
�
(A.1)
This relationship may be rearranged to show the dependence of the J’s on the I’s:
� �
� �
1 1
2 1 2
1 2 for i Ni i
dJ IdxdJ I IdxdJ I I Idx
� �
� � � �
� � � � � � ��
(A.2)
The (N+1)th equation involving IN+1 is simply
11
N
N ii
d dI Idx dx�
�
� �� (A.3)
We can rewrite the first NxN relationship of J in terms of I in matrix notation as shown:
[ ] [ ]
1 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 01 1 1 0 0
01 1
N NdJ Idx
�� �� �� �� �
� �� � �� � �
� �� �� �� �� �� �
�
� �
� � � �
� �
(A.4)
or, more succinctly,1
1[ ][ ] [ ]NN NdJ M Idx
��
�� � (A.4b)
where [ ]NI� is a vector of the current along only the first N resistor planes. Note that 1[ ]NM�
is,
similarly, of dimension NxN.
178
The relationship between the V’s and I’s is given by
1 1i i i i id dV I R I Rdx dx� �
� �2
∇ (A.5)
Again, (N) Vi are described by (N+1) Ii and Ri. However, we can once more use Eq. (A.1) to
write
11
N
N i i N Ni
dV R I R Idx �
�
� �� �� �
� ��
2∇ (A.6)
allowing us to use the vector [ ]NI� . In matrix form this becomes
[ ] [ ]
1 1 1 1
1 2 1
1 1 0 00 1 1 00 0 1 1
00 0 0 1 1
N N
N N N N N
N N
dV I Rdx
R R R R RR R R R
� � � �
�
�� �� �
�� �� ��� �� ��� �� �
�� �� �� � � � �� �� �� �
�
�
� �� � �
� � �
�
� �
2∇ (A.7)
or
2 [ ] [ ] [ ]N N NdV M I Rdx
�
�� � �2
∇ (A.7b)
where it is understood [ ] [ ]N NI R� � is an element-by-element multiplication, not matrix
multiplication. Since 2 [ ]NM�
is an NxN matrix, finding the inverse of M2 is straightforward.
Putting it all together, we have three distinct equations:1
1[ ][ ] [ ]
2 [ ] [ ] [ ]
NN N
N N N
dJ M Idx
dV M I Rdx
JVt C
��
�
�
�
��
�
� �
� � �
��
�
2∇ (A.8)
(Eqs. (A.5) and (A.2) are reprinted here for clarity) where the multiplication (of R� ) and
division (of C� ) mean element-by-element operations instead of matrix operations.
179
Combining these three equations, we can solve for the coupling diffusion matrix, D�
,
resulting in Eq. (4.50).
As mentioned earlier, from this point forward the method described in Chapter 4 for
determining the voltage dynamics using eigenvalues and eigenvectors becomes
straightforward to apply, providing a complete solution to the voltage dynamics of a
multilayer structure.
180
Appendix B: Analysis of Photocurrent Spectra
One of the most interesting effects of thin film deposition (e.g. MBE growth) is
that quantum mechanical effects may dominate the wavefunctions of electrons and holes
due to the very short physical dimensions – on the scale of nanometers – made possible
by these technologies. Quantum wells, for example, strongly affect the band-edge
absorption in semiconductor materials. As described by the quantum-confined Stark
effect [1], exciton absorption peaks undergo a strong shift as an electric field is applied
across the QWs. The wave nature of particles also allows coupling between quantum
wells -- an effect enhanced as barrier thicknesses and well spacing shrink due to greater
overlap of wavefunctions in nearby wells. In a p-i(MQW)-n semiconductor device,
photocurrent spectra may be used to investigate the details of the discrete, quantized
energy levels available to electrons and holes and to see how these levels shift as the
electric field changes. For the work described in this dissertation, photocurrent spectra
provide an important means for checking that the basis for optical switching, the change
in absorption, is understood. This was particularly important for OCOG-1. In that
device, ultrathin barriers – just 5 angstroms thick – were used, raising questions about
whether exciton effects would be observed and, if they were, the coupling behavior
between the wells. Other groups had previously reported that MQW structures with thin
barriers ranging from about 30 Å down to 10 Å exciton behavior was still present.[2, 3].
Only one reference, [2], reported excitonic absorption for 6 Å barriers, but they did not
show their data and added that it faded quickly with field.
B.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
Photocurrent spectra were taken by reverse-biasing the p-i(MQW)-n sample,
shining light on it, and measuring the resulting current. Absorption spectraversus energy
and electric field were made by changing the applied voltage and wavelength. In our
experiments a programmable voltage supply was placed across an OCOG device in series
with a 1 k� resistor. The incident light (3 �W), provided by a tunable c.w. Ti-Sapphire
laser, was chopped at 500 Hz. The current was taken from across the resistor and fed to a
181
lock-in amplifier. The lock-in, the voltage supply, and the tuning control for the laser
were all controlled by a local computer system. Laser power was monitored using a 3 V
reverse biased photodetector and 1 k� resistor and used to normalize the data for laser
power fluctuations. Typical photocurrent spectra are shown in Figs. B.1a and B.1b.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1410
1415
1420
1425
1430
1435
1440
1445
1450
1455
1460
1465
1470
1475Photocurrent (a.u.)
Bias Voltage (V)
Pho
ton
Ene
rgy
(meV
)
1330 -- 1400
1260 -- 1330
1190 -- 1260
1120 -- 1190
1050 -- 1120
980.0 -- 1050
910.0 -- 980.0
840.0 -- 910.0
770.0 -- 840.0
700.0 -- 770.0
630.0 -- 700.0
560.0 -- 630.0
490.0 -- 560.0
420.0 -- 490.0
350.0 -- 420.0
280.0 -- 350.0
210.0 -- 280.0
140.0 -- 210.0
70.00 -- 140.0
0 -- 70.00
Figure B.1a: OCOG-1 photocurrent (arbitrary units).
182
846
848
850
852
854
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Photocurrent (a.u.)W
avel
engt
h (n
m)
Reverse Bias Voltage (V)
1545 -- 1600
1490 -- 1545
1435 -- 1490
1380 -- 1435
1325 -- 1380
1270 -- 1325
1215 -- 1270
1160 -- 1215
1105 -- 1160
1050 -- 1105
995.0 -- 1050
940.0 -- 995.0
885.0 -- 940.0
830.0 -- 885.0
775.0 -- 830.0
720.0 -- 775.0
665.0 -- 720.0
610.0 -- 665.0
555.0 -- 610.0
500.0 -- 555.0
Figure B.1b: OCOG-1 photocurrent, expanded view.
Photocurrent may also be studied in a slightly different manner in order to more
easily distinguish peaks and valleys; specifically, differential photocurrent can be
measured. A graph of the first or second derivatives of the photocurrent with respect to
voltage can be made by adding an oscillatory component to the applied voltage at a
frequency that is also fed to the lock-in. If the lock-in uses that frequency as its
reference, the first derivative is mapped. If the lock-in uses twice that frequency as its
reference, the second derivative is tracked; any magnitude peak or trough value gets
passed through twice in the oscillatory voltage cycle and hence has a component at twice
the oscillatory frequency. The first derivative data is somewhat difficult to interpret since
the original peaks and troughs are now both reported as zeros. On the other hand, with
the second derivative, the original peaks may be clearly distinguished.
To implement a differential spectra measurement, a relatively small 100 mV,
500 Hz modulation voltage was capacitively coupled (0.15 �F) to the circuit and the
chopper was removed. Two 10 k� resistors were used: one placed between the device
183
and ground, the other between the DC bias voltage and the connection between the
capacitor and the device. The current was taken across the second resistor. As can be
seen by comparing Fig. B.2 to Figs. B.1a and b, the spectra are much more vivid and
descriptive.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1410
1420
1430
1440
1450
1460
1470
Photocurrent (a.u.)
Bias Voltage (V)
Ene
rgy
(meV
)
95.00 -- 100.0
90.00 -- 95.00
85.00 -- 90.00
80.00 -- 85.00
75.00 -- 80.00
70.00 -- 75.00
65.00 -- 70.00
60.00 -- 65.00
55.00 -- 60.00
50.00 -- 55.00
45.00 -- 50.00
40.00 -- 45.00
35.00 -- 40.00
30.00 -- 35.00
25.00 -- 30.00
20.00 -- 25.00
15.00 -- 20.00
10.00 -- 15.00
5.000 -- 10.00
0 -- 5.000
Figure B.2: Differential photocurrent (second derivative) of OCOG-1 (a.u.).
B.2 SIMULATION
With the above data in hand, a question of interpretation arose. What absorption
resonances do the various curves represent? This was answered by simulating energy
resonance (absorption) dependence of the device. The simulation of the OCOG-1
absorption spectrum is described below.
B.2.1 DescriptionThe simulation method used finds resonances for electrons or holes via a
transfer-matrix method [4, 5] and then adds a manual adjustment for Coulomb attraction,
a rough approximation of the QCSE. The electron wavefunction, �, can be modeled as a
184
wave with left and right propagating components which undergo either exponential decay
(if the energy of the electron is less than the potential barrier) or sinusoidal phase
oscillation (if the energy of the electron is greater than the potential barrier). At
interfaces where the potential changes, such as between types of material, certain
boundary conditions must be met: both � and 1 dm dz
�� �� �� �
must be continuous, where z is
the direction perpendicular to the interface (often the direction the wave is travelling).
Each boundary condition relates the both the left and right waves on one side of the
interface to the left and right waves on the other side; in other words, a pair of coupled
equations. One way to handle this mathematically is to use a 2x2 matrix to represent the
transformation of the wave crossing such an interface. Similarly, a 2x2 matrix may also
be used to express the propagation of the wave as it travels between interfaces. These
matricies may all be multiplied together to describe the propagation of a wavefunction
through an entire device. The output at one end may be calculated for a given energy by
assuming that at the input there is only, say, a right-going wave. Resonances are
determined by finding at what energies a local maximum in overall ‘transmission’ occurs.
Five coupled GaAs quantum wells, each 100�Šwide and separated by 5 ŠAlAs
barriers were simulated and their resonances found as a function of field
(0-200,000 V/cm). By looking at the resulting wavefunctions as a function of position, it
was possible to identify which if any wells were coupled together for a specific choice of
parameters. Optical absorption resonances were calculated as the differences in the
electron and hole energies added to the bulk bandgap energy and modified (reduced) by
Coulomb attraction. In this model, Coulomb attraction was estimated to reduce
absorption energy by a blanket 4.2 meV. This value was based on a hydrogenic-like
binding energy4
2 2 208B
r
eEh�
� �� , where
11 1
elec holem m�
�
� �� �� �� �
, melec and mhole are the effective
masses of the electron and hole, respectively, and �r is the dielectric constant.[6]
B.2.2 ResultsThe simulation results are presented in the next four graphs. Table B.1 describes
the labeling convention used in these figures below. The primary absorption resonance is
185
due to the lowest energy heavy-hole exciton with both the electron and hole in the ground
state. The QCSE predicts a quadratic shift in energy resonance level as a function of
applied electric field, and as may be seen in Fig. B.3 the primary resonance (blue dots) is
roughly quadratic. The first graph also clearly shows the effect of two resonances
intersecting, in this case that of the heavy hole exciton and the resonance due to the same
hole with the second-lowest energy electron of the adjacent well. When the electron
energy level of the adjacent well approaches that of the electron in the same well with the
hole, energy splitting occurs. The simulations also correctly show the symmetric and
anti-symmetric waveforms with lower and higher energy, respectively.
Table B.1: Legend Notation
Symbol Description Details
e# electron energy level 1=ground state, 2=first excited state, …
h# hole energy level 1=ground state, 2=first excited state, …
w# quantum well number 1 through 5, from left to right
S symmetric wavefunction
AS anti-symmetric wavefunction
1400
1410
1420
1430
1440
1450
1460
1470
1480
1490
0 50000 100000 150000 200000
Electric Field (V/cm)
w3e1, w3h1S w3e1/w2e2, w3h1AS w3e1/w2e2, w3h1
Figure B.3: Simulation of heavy hole exciton and 1st excited electron-state exciton resonance splitting
186
Figure B.4 shows simulation results of intra-well bandgap resonances: electrons
in one well overlap with holes in adjacent wells. Absorption resonance energy in such
cases is primarily determined by the relative energy spacing between the centers of the
wells under consideration. This linear field dependence, a Stark ladder, manifested
clearly in the simulation. In this graph, the resonance level of the ground-state electron
and the hole of an adjacent well is plotted, as is a similar resonance for an electron and
hole both in their first-excited state.
14001410142014301440145014601470148014901500
0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000
Electric Field (V/cm)
w3e1, w4h1w3e2, w4h2
Figure B.4: Simulation of Stark ladders for adjacent wells, ground state electron and hole and 1st excitedstate electron and hole.
The splitting in Fig. B.3 is actually a splitting of the primary heavy-hole exciton
when it overlaps the Stark ladder resonance due to the first-excited state electron coupled
to the adjacent ground-state hole. Other Stark ladder resonances also intersect the
heavy-hole exciton, resulting in various degrees of splitting. In Fig. B.5, coupling
between the first-excited state electron and the ground state hole in the next-to-adjacent
well is shown as well as the resonance splitting due to a similarly coupled second-excited
state electron. Note that the slopes of these next-to-adjacent Stark ladders are twice as
steep as the ones for directly adjacent wells (compare to Fig. B.4).
187
1400
1420
1440
1460
1480
1500
1520
0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000
Electric Field (V/cm)
w3e1, w3h1
S 321 (w1e3/w3e1?), w3h1
AS 321 (w1e3/w3e1 ?),w3h1S w3e2, w5h1
AS w3e2, w5h1
Figure B.5: Simulation of next-to-adjacent well Stark ladder splittings with heavy hole exciton resonance
Figure B.6 combines all of the simulated resonances and their splittings described
above as well as a few others. The result is a rather busy parameter space.
1400
14101420
14301440
1450
14601470
14801490
1500
0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000
Electric Field (V/cm)
w3e1, w3h1S w3e1/w2e2, w3h1AS w3e1/w2e2, w3h1S 321 (w1e3/w3e1?), w3h1AS 321 (w1e3,w3e1?), w3h1w3e1, w4h1w3e2, w4h2S w3e2, w5h1AS w3e2, w5h1
Figure B.6: Simulation of various Stark ladders and the heavy hole exciton resonances
188
B.3 COMPARISON OF SIMULATION TO DATA
The simulation results shown in Fig. B.6 can be compared to the data. As can be
seen in Fig. B.7, the simulation results match the data remarkably well, following several
of the resonance splittings quite closely.
0 5 10 15 201400
1450
1500
Photocurrent (a.u.)
Data and Simulation
Bias Voltage (V)
Pho
ton
Ene
rgy
(meV
)
0 -- 5.000
5.000 -- 10.00
10.00 -- 15.00
15.00 -- 20.00
20.00 -- 25.00
25.00 -- 30.00
30.00 -- 35.00
35.00 -- 40.00
40.00 -- 45.00
45.00 -- 50.00
50.00 -- 55.00
55.00 -- 60.00
60.00 -- 65.00
65.00 -- 70.00
70.00 -- 75.00
75.00 -- 80.00
80.00 -- 85.00
85.00 -- 90.00
90.00 -- 95.00
95.00 -- 100.0
w3e1w4h1
w3e1w3h1
AS3e12e2w3
S3e1e2w3h1
Sw3e2w5h1
ASw3e2w5h1
Figure B.7: OCOG-1 photocurrent data and simulation
One of the limitations of the simulation program is that identifying individual well
wavefunction components becomes difficult that when multiple resonances overlap or are
weak (for example, the resonances around –10V bias). Most of the splittings are due to
Stark Ladders overlapping the main heavy-hole exciton absorption. We can make use of
this by finding clear, isolated Stark Ladders using the photocurrent data, trace them back
189
to their origins (zero-internal bias) using their linear relationship to voltage.1 Such an
origin point should correspond to a basic electron and hole energy level resonance of a
quantum well and can then be compared against expected values provided by simulation
of a single quantum well. Moreover, each origin point acts as the source for one-, two-,
three-, (and so on) well Stark ladders. It is straight-forward to then check if these
assumed Stark ladders themselves correspond to other resonances in the data as well.
This procedure has been carried out in Fig. B.8 and is able to account for almost all of the
resonances seen! Table B.2 compares the origin points of Fig. B.8 to the simulation’s.
Considering that the simulation used only a blanket 4.3 meV adjustment for Coulomb
attraction, Fig. B.8’s origin points and those of the simulation are reasonably
well-matched.
(2,1h),(1,2l)
(1,1h)
(2,2l),(2,2h)
(3,1h)
(1,3l)
(1,1l),(1,2h)
(1,3h)
(2,3h)
(2,2l)
1460
1480
1515
1578
1598
1630
1687
1740
1785
1500
1400
Ener
gy (m
eV)
9 5 . 0 0 - - 1 0 0 . 0
9 0 . 0 0 - - 9 5 . 0 0
8 5 . 0 0 - - 9 0 . 0 0
8 0 . 0 0 - - 8 5 . 0 0
7 5 . 0 0 - - 8 0 . 0 0
7 0 . 0 0 - - 7 5 . 0 0
6 5 . 0 0 - - 7 0 . 0 0
6 0 . 0 0 - - 6 5 . 0 0
5 5 . 0 0 - - 6 0 . 0 0
5 0 . 0 0 - - 5 5 . 0 0
4 5 . 0 0 - - 5 0 . 0 0
4 0 . 0 0 - - 4 5 . 0 0
3 5 . 0 0 - - 4 0 . 0 0
3 0 . 0 0 - - 3 5 . 0 0
2 5 . 0 0 - - 3 0 . 0 0
2 0 . 0 0 - - 2 5 . 0 0
1 5 . 0 0 - - 2 0 . 0 0
1 0 . 0 0 - - 1 5 . 0 0
5 . 0 0 0 - - 1 0 . 0 0
0 - - 5 . 0 0 0
1-well separation2-well separation3-well separation
Stark Ladders:
-1.4 0 5 2010 15Applied reverse bias (V)
Photocurrent (a.u.)
(e#, h#)
Figure B.8: Theoretical Stark ladders overlapped against photocurrent spectra
1 The slopes of the various Stark ladders determined by tracing match theoretical slopes.
190
Table B.2: Comparison Between Simulated and Graphically-Determined
Exciton Resonances
Exciton Resonance Graph (meV) Simulation (meV) Error: Simulation.-Graph (meV)e1, hh1 1460 1461 1
e1, lh1 / e1, hh2 1485 1480 -5e1, hh3 1535 1515 -20
e2, hh2 / e1, lh2 1570 1578 8e2, lh 1 / e2, hh2 1595 1598 3
e2, hh3 1630 1633 3e2, lh2 1675 1687 12e1, lh3 1725 1740 15
191
REFERENCES
1. Miller, D.A.B., et al., "Electronic Field Dependence of Optical Absorption nearthe Bandgap of Quantum Well Structures," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 32, pp. 1043-1060(1985).
2. Goossen, K.W., J.E. Cunningham, and W.Y. Fan, "Electroabsorption inultranarrow-barrier GaAs/AlGaAs multiple quantum well modulators," Appl.Phys. Lett., vol. 64 (1994).
3. Fujiwara, K., K. Kawashima, and T. Imanishi, "Tunneling escape time ofelectrons from the quasibound Stark localized states in ultrathin barrierGaAs/AlAs superlattices," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 54, pp. 17724-17729 (1996).
4. Ricco, B. and M.Y. Azbel, "Physics of resonant tunneling. The one-dimensionaldouble-barrier case," Phys. Rev. B, vol. 29, pp. 1970-1981 (1984).
5. Macleod, H.A., Thin-Film Optical Filters, 2nd Ed (McGraw-Hill, New York,1989).
6. Landolt-Bornstein, Semiconductors. Numberical Data and FunctionalRelationships in Science and Technology, Editor O. Madelung, Vol. 17, pp. 219(Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1982).
192
Appendix C: Optically-Controlled Optical Gate Device Designs
OCOG-1
Table C.1: OCOG-1 Structure DesignDescription Material Thickness Dopant
(angstroms) (cm-3) p layer GaAs 50 Be 1019
Al0.10Ga0.90As 10,000 Be 3x1018
Al0.10Ga0.90As 100 -X94 AlAs 5 -
i (MQW) layer X94 GaAs 100 -AlAs 5Al0.10Ga0.90As 100 -
n layer Al0.10Ga0.90As 1000 Si 1018
AlAs 710 Si 1018
DBR mirror X18 Al0.10Ga0.90As 595 Si 1018
X18 AlAs 710 Si 1018
AlAs 10,000 Si 1018
n+ GaAs (001) substrate
193
OCOG-2
Table C.2: OCOG-2 Structure DesignDescription Material Thickness Dopant
(angstroms) (cm-3) top n layer GaAs 50 Si 1018
Al0.07Ga0.93As 450 Si 1018
top i layer Al0.07Ga0.93As 3,000 -
Al0.07Ga0.93As 6,000 Be 1018
top p layer AlAs 50 Be 1018
Al0.07Ga0.93As 6,000 Be 1018
Al0.07Ga0.93As 500 -bottom i X66 AlAs 50 - (MQW) layer X66 GaAs 95 - AlAs 50 -
Al0.07Ga0.93As 500 -
Al0.07Ga0.93As 5,000 Si 1018
bottom n layer AlAs 50 Si 1018
Al0.07Ga0.93As 5,000 Si 1018
superlattice X30 AlAs 20 -cleaning layer X30 GaAs 20 -
Al0.07Ga0.93As 605 -DBR mirror X25 AlAs 723.6 -
X25 Al0.07Ga0.93As 605 -
undoped GaAs substrate
194
OCOG-3
Table C.3: OCOG-3 Structure DesignDescription Material Thickness Dopant
(angstroms) (cm-3)
GaAs 50 Be 1019
top p layer Al0.34Ga0.66As 50 Be 1019
Al0.34Ga0.66As 400 Be 1018
top i layer Al0.34Ga0.66As 1,000 -
Al0.34Ga0.66As 2,000 Si 1018
top n layer AlAs 300 Si 1018
Al0.07Ga0.93As 3,000 Si 1018
Al0.34Ga0.66As 3,000 Be 1018
bottom p layer AlAs 300 Be 1018
Al0.34Ga0.66As 7,000 Be 1018
Al0.34Ga0.66As 100 - bottom i X60 AlAs 40 - (MQW) layer X60 GaAs 120
Al0.34Ga0.66As 100 -
bottom n layer AlAs 200 Si 1018
Al0.34Ga0.66As 5,000 Si 1018
AlAs 711 Si 1018
DBR mirror X25 Al0.34Ga0.66As 628 Si 1018
X25 AlAs 711 Si 1018
AlAs 10,000 Si 1018
undoped GaAs substrate